Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/NEWS @ 28923:dcafe3c9cd6c
(sh-while-getopts) <sh>: Handle case that
user-specified option string is empty.
| author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Mon, 15 May 2000 20:14:39 +0000 |
| parents | 4f53731e6965 |
| children | f100c3d709e4 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 27200 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000 |
| 2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
| 25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
| 4 | |
| 5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
| 6 For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
| 7 | |
| 8 | |
| 25995 | 9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
| 10 | |
| 28166 | 11 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
| 12 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
| 13 | |
| 14 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for | |
| 15 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them. | |
| 16 | |
| 17 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 | |
| 18 | |
| 28919 | 19 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
| 20 | |
| 28912 | 21 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
| 22 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
| 23 | |
| 28799 | 24 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
| 25 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
| 26 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
| 27 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
| 28 | |
| 28699 | 29 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
| 30 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
|
28776
49a91eb4274c
Describe the different auto-save-file-list-prefix on MS-DOS.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28759
diff
changeset
|
31 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) |
| 28699 | 32 You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location. |
| 33 | |
| 28695 | 34 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
| 35 on the display using several methods | |
| 36 | |
| 37 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be | |
| 38 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
| 39 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
| 40 | |
| 41 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is | |
| 42 equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter. | |
| 43 | |
| 28870 | 44 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
| 28695 | 45 |
| 46 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
| 47 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
| 48 | |
| 28626 | 49 ** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create |
| 28660 | 50 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
| 51 command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, | |
| 52 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. | |
| 28626 | 53 |
|
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
54 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
| 28757 | 55 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
| 56 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
|
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
57 |
| 28396 | 58 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
| 59 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
| 60 | |
| 28159 | 61 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
| 62 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
| 63 this behavior. | |
| 64 | |
| 65 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte | |
| 66 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let | |
| 67 Emacs dump core. | |
| 68 | |
| 69 ** New X resources recognized | |
| 27994 | 70 |
| 28140 | 71 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
| 72 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
| 73 is useful for debugging X problems. | |
| 74 | |
| 75 Example: | |
| 76 | |
| 28159 | 77 emacs.synchronous: true |
| 28140 | 78 |
| 27994 | 79 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
| 80 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
| 27995 | 81 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
| 82 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
| 83 visual class names are | |
| 27994 | 84 |
| 85 TrueColor | |
| 86 PseudoColor | |
| 87 DirectColor | |
| 88 StaticColor | |
| 89 GrayScale | |
| 90 StaticGray | |
| 91 | |
| 92 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
| 93 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
| 94 meaning. | |
| 95 | |
| 27995 | 96 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
| 97 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
| 98 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
| 99 visual. | |
| 100 | |
| 101 Example: | |
| 102 | |
| 28159 | 103 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
| 27994 | 104 |
| 105 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
| 106 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
| 107 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
| 108 resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
| 109 | |
| 27995 | 110 Example: |
| 111 | |
| 28159 | 112 emacs.privateColormap: true |
| 27995 | 113 |
|
27966
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
114 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
|
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
115 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
|
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
116 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
|
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
117 |
| 27847 | 118 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to |
| 27845 | 119 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is |
| 27847 | 120 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can |
| 121 be customized. | |
| 27845 | 122 |
| 27770 | 123 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
| 124 | |
| 27473 | 125 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
| 126 all frames except the selected one. | |
| 127 | |
| 27369 | 128 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
| 129 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
| 130 | |
| 27356 | 131 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
| 132 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo | |
| 133 area or with tooltips. | |
| 134 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
135 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
136 read mail from the menu etc. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
137 |
| 28658 | 138 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
| 139 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
| 140 | |
| 28626 | 141 ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
| 142 | |
| 143 ** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo | |
| 144 macros | |
| 145 | |
| 146 Key binding Macro | |
| 147 ------------------------- | |
| 148 C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
| 149 C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
| 150 C-c C-c u @url | |
| 151 C-c C-c q @quotation | |
| 152 C-c C-c m @email | |
| 153 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
154 ** Changes in Outline mode. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
155 |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
156 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
157 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
158 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
159 |
| 27200 | 160 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
| 161 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
| 162 | |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
163 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
164 or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
165 several other special buffers. |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
166 |
|
26432
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
167 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
168 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
169 .emacs file. |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
170 |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
171 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount' |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
172 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
173 |
| 26417 | 174 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
| 175 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
| 176 `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
| 177 | |
|
26322
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
178 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
179 is running in batch mode. For example, |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
180 |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
181 (message "%s" (read t)) |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
182 |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
183 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
184 to standard output. |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
185 |
| 25853 | 186 ** Faces and frame parameters. |
| 187 | |
| 188 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
| 189 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
| 190 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
| 191 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
| 192 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
| 193 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
| 194 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
| 195 | |
| 196 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
| 197 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
| 26264 | 198 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
| 25853 | 199 `default' face and vice versa. |
| 200 | |
| 25951 | 201 ** New face `menu'. |
| 202 | |
| 203 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
| 204 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
| 205 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
| 206 | |
| 25853 | 207 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
| 208 | |
| 209 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
| 210 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
| 211 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
| 212 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
| 213 | |
| 214 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
| 215 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
| 216 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
| 217 | |
| 218 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
| 219 `ScreenGamma'. | |
| 220 | |
| 221 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
| 222 | |
| 223 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
| 224 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
| 225 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
| 226 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
| 227 the text. | |
| 228 | |
| 229 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
| 230 | |
| 231 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
| 232 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
| 233 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
| 234 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
| 235 specify a font. | |
| 236 | |
| 237 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
| 238 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
| 239 under Lisp changes, below. | |
| 240 | |
| 241 ** New default font is Courier 12pt. | |
| 242 | |
| 243 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of | |
| 244 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, | |
| 245 it is hollow. | |
| 246 | |
| 247 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
| 248 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
| 249 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
| 250 customizing face `fringe'. | |
| 251 | |
| 252 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You | |
| 253 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. | |
| 254 | |
| 255 ** LessTif support. | |
| 256 | |
| 257 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will | |
| 258 need a version 0.88.1 or later. | |
| 259 | |
| 260 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
| 261 | |
| 262 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | |
| 263 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | |
| 264 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
| 265 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
| 266 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
| 267 Emacs. | |
| 268 | |
| 269 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
| 270 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
| 271 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
| 272 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
| 273 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
| 274 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
| 275 | |
| 276 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
| 277 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
| 278 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
| 279 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
| 280 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
| 281 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
| 282 | |
| 283 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
| 284 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
| 285 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
| 286 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
| 287 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
| 288 | |
| 289 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
| 290 | |
| 291 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
| 292 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
| 293 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
| 294 | |
| 295 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
| 296 | |
| 297 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
| 298 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
| 299 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
| 300 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
| 301 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
| 302 whitespace. | |
| 303 | |
| 304 ** Busy-cursor. | |
| 305 | |
| 306 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the | |
| 307 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
| 308 | |
| 309 ** Blinking cursor | |
| 310 | |
| 311 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
| 312 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
| 313 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
| 314 the group `cursor'. | |
| 315 | |
| 316 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
| 317 | |
| 318 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
| 319 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
| 320 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
| 321 details. | |
| 322 | |
| 323 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
| 324 have to do anything to activate it. | |
| 325 | |
| 326 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
| 327 | |
| 328 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
| 329 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
| 330 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
| 331 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
| 332 | |
| 333 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
| 334 | |
| 335 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
| 336 | |
| 337 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
| 338 | |
|
28677
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
339 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
340 LessTif/Motif one. |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
341 |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
342 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
343 LessTif and Motif. |
| 25853 | 344 |
| 345 ** Hscrolling in C code. | |
| 346 | |
| 28695 | 347 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if |
| 348 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
| 349 customized. | |
| 25853 | 350 |
| 351 ** Tool bar support. | |
| 352 | |
| 353 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
| 354 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. | |
| 355 | |
| 356 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
| 357 | |
| 358 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | |
| 359 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | |
| 360 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | |
| 361 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | |
| 362 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | |
| 363 | |
| 364 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
| 365 | |
| 366 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
| 367 buffers. | |
| 368 | |
| 369 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
| 370 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
| 371 | |
| 372 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
| 373 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
374 - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') |
| 25853 | 375 toggles the read-only status. |
| 376 | |
| 377 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. | |
| 378 | |
| 379 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
| 380 | |
| 381 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
| 26652 | 382 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
| 25853 | 383 non-nil. |
| 384 | |
| 385 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
| 386 | |
| 387 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
| 388 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
| 389 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
| 390 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
| 391 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
| 392 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored. | |
| 393 | |
| 394 ** Sound support | |
| 395 | |
| 396 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
| 397 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
| 398 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
| 399 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
| 400 to enable sound support. | |
| 401 | |
| 402 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | |
| 403 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
| 404 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
| 405 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
| 406 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
| 407 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
| 408 | |
| 409 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
| 410 | |
| 411 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | |
| 412 | |
| 413 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
| 414 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
| 415 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
| 416 | |
| 417 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
| 418 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
| 419 | |
| 420 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
| 421 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
| 422 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
| 423 | |
| 424 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
| 425 | |
| 426 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
| 427 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a | |
| 428 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
| 429 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | |
| 430 | |
| 431 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
| 432 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a | |
| 433 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
| 434 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | |
| 435 | |
| 436 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
| 437 notably at the end of lines. | |
| 438 | |
| 439 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
| 440 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
| 441 | |
| 28132 | 442 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle. |
| 443 | |
| 25853 | 444 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
| 445 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
| 446 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
| 447 | |
| 28847 | 448 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `E' that lets you |
| 28805 | 449 edit the replacement string. |
| 450 | |
| 451 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's | |
| 452 you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to | |
| 453 lisp-complete-symbol. | |
| 454 | |
| 25853 | 455 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
| 456 | |
| 457 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are | |
| 458 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is | |
| 459 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size | |
| 460 by setting the following variable: | |
| 461 | |
| 462 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
| 463 | |
| 464 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
| 465 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
| 466 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. | |
| 467 | |
| 468 Default is 0.25. | |
| 469 | |
| 27017 | 470 ** Changes to hideshow.el |
| 471 | |
| 472 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block | |
| 473 selection and traversal and includes more isearch support. | |
| 474 | |
| 475 *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
| 476 | |
| 477 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps | |
| 478 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying | |
| 479 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a | |
| 480 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts | |
| 481 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func' | |
| 482 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp'). | |
| 483 | |
| 484 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero, | |
| 485 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is | |
| 486 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see | |
| 487 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details. | |
| 488 | |
| 489 *** Isearch support for updating mode line | |
| 490 | |
| 491 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden | |
| 492 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the | |
| 493 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden | |
| 494 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block | |
| 495 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil. | |
| 496 | |
| 497 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include | |
| 498 something like this in your .emacs. | |
| 499 | |
| 500 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook | |
| 501 (lambda () | |
| 502 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline))) | |
| 503 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
504 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
505 |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
506 If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
507 entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
508 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
509 |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
510 New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
511 buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary. |
|
27005
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
512 |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
513 Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
514 if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
515 |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
516 The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
517 expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
518 cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
519 a file. |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
520 |
|
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
521 ** Changes in Font Lock |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
522 |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
523 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
524 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
525 mode. |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
526 |
| 26606 | 527 ** Comint (subshell) changes |
| 528 | |
| 529 Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
| 530 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
| 531 | |
| 532 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
| 533 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
| 534 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
| 535 | |
| 536 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
| 537 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
| 538 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
| 539 | |
|
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
540 ** Changes to Rmail mode |
|
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
541 |
| 28492 | 542 *** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
| 543 set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when | |
| 544 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the | |
| 545 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
| 546 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
| 547 as correspondent. | |
| 548 | |
| 549 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
| 550 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
| 551 regexp matching your mail adresses. | |
| 552 | |
| 28292 | 553 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
| 554 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
| 555 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
| 556 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
| 557 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
| 558 | |
| 27361 | 559 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
| 560 like `j'. | |
| 561 | |
|
27381
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
562 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
|
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
563 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
|
27378
af3075bcc264
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27369
diff
changeset
|
564 digest message. |
|
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
565 |
| 26271 | 566 ** Changes to TeX mode |
| 567 | |
| 568 The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
| 569 `latex-mode'. | |
| 570 | |
| 25853 | 571 ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 572 | |
| 573 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
| 574 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
| 575 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
| 576 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
| 577 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
| 578 can be edited from that buffer. | |
| 579 | |
| 580 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
| 581 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
| 582 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
| 583 | |
| 584 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
| 585 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
| 586 | |
| 587 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
| 588 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
| 589 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
| 590 been cited. | |
| 591 | |
|
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
592 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
593 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
594 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
595 in column 1 are always made leaves. |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
596 |
| 25853 | 597 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
| 598 has the following new features: | |
| 599 | |
| 600 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
| 601 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
| 602 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
| 603 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
| 604 | |
| 605 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
| 606 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
| 607 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
| 608 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
| 609 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
| 610 defaults to 1. | |
| 611 | |
| 612 ** Tooltips. | |
| 613 | |
| 614 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
| 615 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you | |
| 616 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
| 617 | |
| 618 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
| 619 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
| 620 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
| 621 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
| 622 | |
| 623 ** Customize changes | |
| 624 | |
| 625 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
| 26096 | 626 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will |
| 627 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs. | |
| 25853 | 628 |
| 629 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
| 630 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
| 631 default). | |
| 632 | |
|
26834
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
633 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
634 between custom options. Example: |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
635 |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
636 (defcustom default-input-method nil |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
637 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
638 This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
639 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
640 :group 'mule |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
641 :type '(choice (const nil) string) |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
642 :set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
643 |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
644 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
645 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
646 first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
647 |
| 25853 | 648 ** New features in evaluation commands |
| 649 | |
| 650 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp | |
| 651 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
| 652 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
| 653 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
| 654 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
| 655 | |
| 656 ** Dired changes | |
| 657 | |
| 658 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
| 659 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
| 660 is, delete only empty directories. | |
| 661 | |
| 662 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
| 663 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
| 664 copy directories recursively. | |
| 665 | |
|
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
666 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
667 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
668 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
669 |
| 25853 | 670 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
| 671 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
| 672 | |
| 26820 | 673 ** CC mode changes. |
| 674 | |
| 675 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
| 676 current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
| 677 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
| 678 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
| 679 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
| 680 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
| 681 release. | |
| 682 | |
| 683 *** New initialization procedure for the style system. | |
| 684 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
| 685 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
| 686 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
| 687 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
| 688 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
| 689 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
| 690 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
| 691 | |
| 692 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
| 693 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
| 694 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
| 695 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
| 696 above. | |
| 697 | |
| 698 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
| 699 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
| 700 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
| 701 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
| 702 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
| 703 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
| 704 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
| 705 function documentation for more info. | |
| 706 | |
| 707 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
| 708 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
| 709 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
| 710 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
| 711 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
| 712 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
| 713 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
| 714 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
| 715 | |
| 716 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
| 717 | |
| 718 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
| 719 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
| 720 | |
| 721 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
| 722 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
| 723 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
| 724 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
| 725 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
| 726 style system. | |
| 727 | |
| 728 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
| 729 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
| 730 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
| 731 as far as possible. | |
| 732 | |
| 733 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
| 734 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
| 735 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
| 736 chapter about this in the manual. | |
| 737 | |
| 738 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
| 739 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
| 740 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
| 741 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
| 742 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
| 743 | |
| 744 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
| 745 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
| 746 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
| 747 | |
| 748 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
| 749 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
| 750 | |
| 751 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
| 752 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
| 753 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
| 754 inside CC Mode. | |
| 755 | |
| 756 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
| 757 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
| 758 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
| 759 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
| 760 cc-mode/). | |
| 761 | |
| 762 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
| 763 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
| 764 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
| 765 literals. | |
| 766 | |
| 767 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
| 768 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
| 769 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
| 770 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
| 771 this function. | |
| 772 | |
| 773 *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
| 774 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
| 775 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
| 776 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
| 777 Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
| 778 | |
| 779 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
| 780 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
| 781 opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
| 782 | |
| 783 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
| 784 | |
| 785 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
| 786 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
| 787 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
| 788 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
| 789 | |
| 790 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
| 791 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
| 792 the column specified by comment-column. | |
| 793 | |
| 794 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
| 795 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
| 796 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
| 797 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
| 798 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
| 799 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
| 800 | |
| 801 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
| 802 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
| 803 arguments. | |
| 804 | |
| 805 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
| 806 | |
| 807 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
| 808 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
| 809 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
| 810 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
| 811 Provan). | |
| 812 | |
| 813 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
| 814 | |
| 28506 | 815 ** Makefile mode changes |
| 816 | |
| 817 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
| 818 | |
| 819 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when | |
| 820 Fontlock mode is active. | |
| 821 | |
| 26407 | 822 ** Isearch changes |
| 823 | |
| 28506 | 824 ** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, |
| 825 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys | |
| 826 that started the search. | |
| 827 | |
| 26407 | 828 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
| 25853 | 829 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
| 830 | |
| 26407 | 831 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
| 832 | |
| 26417 | 833 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
| 26407 | 834 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
| 835 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
| 836 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
| 837 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
| 838 `secondary-selection'. | |
| 839 | |
| 840 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
| 841 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
| 842 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
| 843 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
| 844 usual snappy response. | |
| 845 | |
| 846 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
| 847 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
| 848 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
| 849 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
| 850 | |
|
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
851 ** Changes in sort.el |
|
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
852 |
|
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
853 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
|
27533
6dfbe5197843
A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27498
diff
changeset
|
854 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
|
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
855 new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default |
|
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
856 numeric base. |
| 26407 | 857 |
| 28194 | 858 ** Changes to Ange-ftp |
| 859 | |
| 860 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file | |
| 25929 | 861 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
| 862 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
| 863 | |
| 28194 | 864 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
| 865 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
| 866 | |
| 25984 | 867 ** Shell script mode changes. |
| 868 | |
| 869 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
| 870 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and | |
| 871 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
| 872 | |
| 26264 | 873 ** Etags changes. |
| 874 | |
| 875 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
| 876 | |
|
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
877 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
|
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
878 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
879 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
880 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
881 a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
|
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
882 |
| 26264 | 883 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
| 884 declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
| 885 | |
| 886 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
|
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
887 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
| 26264 | 888 |
| 889 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
| 890 types. | |
| 891 | |
| 892 *** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged. | |
| 893 | |
| 894 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
| 895 | |
| 896 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
| 897 are now tagged. | |
| 898 | |
| 899 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
| 900 variables are tagged. | |
| 901 | |
| 902 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
| 903 | |
|
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
904 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
905 for PSWrap. |
| 26264 | 906 |
|
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
907 ** Changes in etags.el |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
908 |
| 28244 | 909 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
| 910 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
| 911 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
| 912 | |
|
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
913 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
914 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
915 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
916 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
917 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
918 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
919 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
920 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
921 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
922 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
923 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
924 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
925 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
926 A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
927 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
928 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
929 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
930 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
931 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
932 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
933 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
934 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
935 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
936 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
937 |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
938 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
939 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
940 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
941 |
| 26016 | 942 ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
| 943 These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14 | |
| 944 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is | |
| 945 currently no specific input method support for them. | |
| 946 | |
| 26652 | 947 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to |
| 948 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now | |
| 949 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
| 950 | |
| 951 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
| 952 | |
| 26768 | 953 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
| 954 | |
| 28492 | 955 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps' |
| 956 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular | |
| 957 expression from that list, are not checked. | |
| 958 | |
| 25853 | 959 ** New modes and packages |
| 960 | |
| 28879 | 961 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
| 962 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
| 963 separate Texinfo file. | |
| 964 | |
|
28854
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
965 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
966 or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
967 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
968 It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
969 used to enter checkin log messages. |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
970 |
| 28834 | 971 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
| 972 without invoking external programs. | |
| 973 | |
| 974 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
| 975 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
| 976 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
| 977 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
| 978 Groff or `troff' are not readily available. | |
| 979 | |
| 980 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
| 981 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
| 982 | |
| 28098 | 983 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
| 984 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
| 985 | |
| 986 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
| 987 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
| 988 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
| 989 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
| 990 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
| 991 single step. | |
| 992 | |
| 993 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
| 994 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
| 995 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
| 996 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
| 997 | |
| 27644 | 998 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
| 999 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
| 1000 actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
| 1001 | |
| 27498 | 1002 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
| 1003 PostScript. | |
| 1004 | |
| 1005 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
| 1006 | |
| 1007 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
| 1008 | |
| 1009 ; comment (until end of line) | |
| 1010 A non-terminal | |
| 1011 "C" terminal | |
| 1012 ?C? special | |
| 1013 $A default non-terminal | |
| 1014 $"C" default terminal | |
| 1015 $?C? default special | |
| 1016 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
| 1017 C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
| 1018 C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
| 1019 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
| 1020 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
| 1021 (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
| 1022 [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
| 1023 C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
| 1024 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
| 1025 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
| 1026 {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
| 1027 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
| 1028 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
| 1029 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
| 1030 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
| 1031 | |
| 1032 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
| 1033 | |
| 27328 | 1034 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
| 1035 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
| 1036 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
| 1037 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
| 1038 equal signs of assignments. | |
| 1039 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1040 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1041 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1042 |
| 27016 | 1043 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
| 1044 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
| 1045 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to | |
| 1046 customize the package. | |
| 1047 | |
| 27733 | 1048 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
| 1049 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
| 1050 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
| 1051 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
| 1052 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
| 1053 which answers different needs. | |
| 1054 | |
|
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1055 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1056 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1057 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1058 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1059 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1060 to be enabled. |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1061 |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1062 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1063 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1064 |
| 25853 | 1065 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
| 1066 | |
| 1067 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. | |
| 1068 | |
| 1069 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
| 1070 | |
| 1071 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | |
| 1072 Pascal) language. | |
| 1073 | |
| 1074 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
| 1075 the text at point. | |
| 1076 | |
| 1077 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
| 1078 | |
| 25862 | 1079 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
| 1080 | |
| 25853 | 1081 *** whitespace.el ??? |
| 1082 | |
| 25992 | 1083 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
| 1084 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
| 1085 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
| 1086 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
| 1087 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
| 1088 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
| 1089 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
| 1090 | |
| 1091 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
| 1092 | |
| 1093 Here is an example of columns: | |
| 1094 | |
| 1095 horse apple bus | |
| 1096 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
| 1097 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
| 1098 | |
| 1099 Doing the following settings: | |
| 1100 | |
| 1101 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
| 1102 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
| 1103 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
| 1104 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
| 1105 | |
| 1106 | |
| 1107 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
| 1108 | |
| 1109 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
| 1110 | |
| 1111 It results: | |
| 1112 | |
| 1113 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
| 1114 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
| 1115 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
| 1116 | |
| 1117 delim-col has the following options: | |
| 1118 | |
| 1119 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
| 1120 before all columns. | |
| 1121 | |
| 1122 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
| 1123 between each column. | |
| 1124 | |
| 1125 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
| 1126 after all columns. | |
| 1127 | |
| 1128 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
| 1129 each column. | |
| 1130 | |
| 1131 delim-col has the following commands: | |
| 1132 | |
| 1133 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
| 1134 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
| 1135 | |
|
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1136 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1137 were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1138 is displayed in the "Files" menu. |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1139 |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1140 The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions. |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1141 |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1142 To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode. |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1143 |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1144 To enable recentf at Emacs startup use |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1145 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET. |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1146 |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1147 To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1148 M-x customize-group RET recentf RET. |
|
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1149 |
| 26149 | 1150 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
| 1151 text. | |
| 1152 | |
| 26924 | 1153 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
| 26786 | 1154 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
| 1155 specific to Message mode. | |
| 1156 | |
| 26924 | 1157 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
| 1158 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
| 1159 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
| 1160 | |
|
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1161 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
|
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1162 interface to access directory servers using different directory |
|
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1163 protocols. It has a separate manual. |
|
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1164 |
| 28132 | 1165 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
| 1166 for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
| 1167 | |
| 28710 | 1168 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
|
28855
1be9a502caca
Cleaned some left over bogus conflict markers.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28854
diff
changeset
|
1169 |
| 28710 | 1170 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
| 1171 minibuffer with completion. | |
|
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1172 |
| 28883 | 1173 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
| 1174 with the diary features. | |
| 1175 | |
| 28912 | 1176 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
| 1177 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
| 1178 | |
| 25853 | 1179 ** Withdrawn packages |
| 1180 | |
| 1181 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
| 1182 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
| 26133 | 1183 |
| 27369 | 1184 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
| 1185 | |
| 1186 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
| 25853 | 1187 |
| 1188 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | |
| 1189 | |
| 1190 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
| 1191 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
| 1192 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
| 1193 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
| 1194 | |
| 28883 | 1195 +++ |
| 28847 | 1196 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
| 1197 that offset in the file before writing. | |
| 1198 | |
| 28757 | 1199 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as |
| 1200 promised long ago. | |
| 1201 | |
| 28724 | 1202 ** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor |
| 1203 modes. | |
| 1204 | |
| 28751 | 1205 - Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN |
| 1206 | |
| 1207 Register a new minor mode. | |
| 1208 | |
| 1209 TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that | |
| 1210 is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not. | |
| 1211 | |
| 1212 NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode | |
| 1213 is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a | |
| 1214 symbol whose value is such a string. | |
| 1215 | |
| 1216 Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added | |
| 1217 to `minor-mode-map-alist'. | |
| 1218 | |
| 1219 Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER | |
| 1220 in `minor-mode-alist'. | |
| 1221 | |
| 1222 Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen. | |
| 1223 It is currently not used. | |
| 28724 | 1224 |
| 28710 | 1225 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
| 1226 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
| 1227 from which the command was issued. | |
| 1228 | |
| 1229 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
| 1230 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
| 1231 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
| 1232 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
| 1233 operate on. | |
| 1234 | |
| 28658 | 1235 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
| 1236 to `window-buffer-height'. | |
| 1237 | |
| 1238 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
| 1239 | |
| 1240 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
| 1241 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
| 1242 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
| 1243 | |
| 1244 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
| 1245 respectively. | |
| 1246 | |
| 1247 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument | |
| 1248 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. | |
| 1249 | |
| 1250 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
| 1251 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
| 1252 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
| 1253 | |
| 1254 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
| 1255 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
| 1256 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
| 1257 is currently displayed in some window. | |
| 1258 | |
| 28556 | 1259 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
| 1260 argument function's results. | |
| 1261 | |
| 28496 | 1262 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
| 1263 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. | |
| 1264 | |
| 28492 | 1265 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
| 1266 header is the list of headers passed to it. | |
| 1267 | |
| 1268 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
| 1269 ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
| 1270 | |
| 1271 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
| 28323 | 1272 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
| 1273 as follows: | |
| 1274 | |
| 1275 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
| 1276 nil don't display a cursor | |
| 1277 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
| 1278 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
| 1279 others display a box cursor. | |
| 1280 | |
| 28303 | 1281 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
| 1282 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
| 1283 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
| 1284 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
| 1285 | |
| 28194 | 1286 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
|
28854
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1287 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
| 28194 | 1288 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
| 1289 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
| 1290 | |
| 1291 Example: | |
| 1292 | |
| 1293 (string-to-syntax "()") | |
| 1294 => (4 . 41) | |
| 1295 | |
| 28166 | 1296 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
| 1297 other than 10. | |
| 1298 | |
| 1299 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
| 1300 INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
| 1301 | |
| 1302 #b1111 | |
| 1303 => 15 | |
| 1304 #b-1111 | |
| 1305 => -15 | |
| 1306 | |
| 1307 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
| 1308 | |
| 1309 #o666 | |
| 1310 => 438 | |
| 1311 | |
| 1312 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
| 1313 | |
| 1314 #xbeef | |
| 1315 => 48815 | |
| 1316 | |
| 1317 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
| 1318 | |
| 1319 #2R-111 | |
| 1320 => -7 | |
| 1321 #25rah | |
| 1322 => 267 | |
| 1323 | |
| 28335 | 1324 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
| 28037 | 1325 the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
| 1326 and isn't a string. | |
| 1327 | |
| 28335 | 1328 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
| 1329 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
| 1330 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
| 1331 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
| 1332 | |
|
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1333 +++ |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1334 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1335 |
| 28149 | 1336 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
|
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1337 for a regexp in a string. |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1338 |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1339 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1340 `mouse-position-function'. |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1341 |
| 27827 | 1342 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
| 1343 that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
| 1344 | |
| 27820 | 1345 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
| 1346 Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
| 1347 | |
| 27770 | 1348 +++ |
| 1349 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
| 1350 returns it. | |
| 1351 | |
| 27276 | 1352 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
| 1353 returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
| 1354 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1355 +++ |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1356 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1357 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1358 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1359 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1360 mode. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1361 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1362 +++ |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1363 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1364 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1365 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1366 +++ |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1367 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1368 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1369 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1370 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1371 been performed." |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1372 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1373 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1374 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1375 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1376 then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1377 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1378 +++ |
| 26737 | 1379 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
| 1380 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
| 1381 and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
| 1382 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1383 +++ |
| 26467 | 1384 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
| 1385 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
| 1386 specified table. | |
| 1387 | |
| 1388 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
| 1389 | |
| 1390 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
|
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1391 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
|
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1392 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
|
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1393 what BODY returns. |
| 26467 | 1394 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1395 +++ |
|
27693
d8bedafef8d5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27644
diff
changeset
|
1396 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
|
28063
f1b33463506d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28051
diff
changeset
|
1397 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1398 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1399 +++ |
|
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1400 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
|
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1401 removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
|
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1402 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1403 +++ |
|
26360
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1404 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
|
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1405 instead of being optional. |
|
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1406 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1407 +++ |
|
26277
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1408 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
|
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1409 modify read-only text. |
|
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1410 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1411 +++ |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1412 ** New functions and variables for locales. |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1413 |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1414 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1415 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
|
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1416 time functions like strftime. The new variables |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1417 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1418 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1419 |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1420 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1421 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1422 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
|
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1423 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1424 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1425 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1426 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1427 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1428 +++ |
|
26107
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1429 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1430 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1431 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1432 start sequences. |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1433 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1434 +++ |
|
25910
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1435 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
|
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1436 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
|
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1437 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1438 +++ |
| 25853 | 1439 ** New function `propertize' |
| 1440 | |
| 1441 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
| 1442 strings with text properties. | |
| 1443 | |
| 1444 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
| 1445 | |
| 1446 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
| 1447 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
| 1448 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
| 1449 specified value of that property. Example: | |
| 1450 | |
| 1451 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
| 1452 | |
| 1453 +++ | |
| 1454 ** push and pop macros. | |
| 1455 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1456 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1457 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
| 25853 | 1458 as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
| 1459 | |
| 1460 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
| 1461 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
| 1462 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
| 1463 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1464 ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1465 |
|
27387
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1466 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
|
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1467 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1468 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1469 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1470 Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1471 using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1472 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1473 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1474 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1475 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1476 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1477 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1478 |
| 25853 | 1479 +++ |
| 1480 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such | |
| 1481 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. | |
| 1482 | |
| 1483 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
| 1484 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
| 1485 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
| 1486 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
| 1487 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
| 1488 space, and DEL. | |
| 1489 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
| 1490 and DEL. | |
| 1491 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
| 1492 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
| 1493 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
| 1494 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
| 1495 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
| 1496 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
| 1497 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
| 1498 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
| 1499 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
| 1500 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
| 1501 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
| 1502 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
| 1503 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
| 1504 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
| 1505 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
| 1506 | |
| 1507 +++ | |
| 1508 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
| 1509 | |
| 1510 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
| 1511 | |
| 1512 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
| 1513 | |
| 1514 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
| 1515 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
| 1516 | |
| 1517 :test TEST | |
| 1518 | |
| 1519 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
| 1520 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
| 1521 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
| 1522 | |
| 1523 :size SIZE | |
| 1524 | |
| 1525 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
| 1526 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
| 1527 | |
| 1528 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
| 1529 | |
| 1530 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
| 1531 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
| 1532 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
| 1533 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
| 1534 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
| 1535 | |
| 1536 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
| 1537 | |
| 1538 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
| 1539 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
| 1540 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
| 1541 | |
| 1542 :weakness WEAK | |
| 1543 | |
| 1544 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t. | |
| 1545 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if | |
| 1546 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the | |
| 1547 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
| 1548 | |
| 1549 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
| 1550 | |
| 1551 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
| 1552 | |
| 1553 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
| 1554 | |
| 1555 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
| 1556 | |
| 1557 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
| 1558 | |
| 1559 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
| 1560 values are shared. | |
| 1561 | |
| 1562 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
| 1563 | |
| 1564 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
| 1565 | |
| 1566 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
| 1567 | |
| 1568 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
| 1569 | |
| 1570 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
| 1571 | |
| 1572 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
| 1573 | |
| 1574 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
| 1575 | |
| 1576 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
| 1577 | |
| 1578 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE | |
| 1579 | |
| 1580 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
| 1581 | |
| 1582 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
| 1583 | |
| 1584 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
| 1585 | |
| 1586 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
| 1587 | |
| 1588 Clear TABLE. | |
| 1589 | |
| 1590 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
| 1591 | |
| 1592 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
| 1593 not found. | |
| 1594 | |
| 26264 | 1595 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
| 25853 | 1596 |
| 1597 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
| 1598 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
| 1599 | |
| 1600 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
| 1601 | |
| 1602 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
| 1603 | |
| 1604 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
| 1605 | |
| 1606 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
| 1607 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
| 1608 | |
| 1609 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
| 1610 | |
| 1611 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
| 1612 | |
| 1613 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
| 1614 | |
| 1615 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
| 1616 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
| 26264 | 1617 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
| 25853 | 1618 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
| 1619 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
| 1620 | |
| 1621 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
| 1622 | |
| 1623 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
| 1624 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
| 1625 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
| 1628 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
| 1629 | |
| 1630 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
| 1631 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
| 1632 | |
| 1633 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
| 1634 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
| 1635 | |
| 26264 | 1636 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
| 25853 | 1637 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
| 1638 | |
| 1639 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
| 1640 | |
| 1641 +++ | |
| 1642 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
| 1643 | |
| 1644 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
| 1645 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
| 1646 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
| 1647 | |
| 1648 +++ | |
| 1649 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
| 1650 | |
| 1651 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
| 1652 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
| 1653 | |
| 1654 +++ | |
| 1655 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
| 1656 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
| 1657 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
| 1658 is too short to reach that column. | |
| 1659 | |
| 1660 +++ | |
| 1661 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
| 1662 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
| 1663 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
| 1664 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
| 1667 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
| 1668 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
| 1669 | |
| 1670 +++ | |
| 1671 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
| 1672 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
| 1673 | |
| 1674 +++ | |
| 1675 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
| 1676 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
| 1677 | |
| 1678 +++ | |
| 1679 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
| 1680 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
| 1681 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
| 1682 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
| 1683 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
| 1684 | |
| 1685 +++ | |
| 1686 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
| 1687 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
| 1688 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
| 1689 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
| 1690 | |
| 1691 +++ | |
| 1692 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
| 1693 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | |
| 1694 | |
| 1695 +++ | |
| 1696 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
| 1697 | |
| 1698 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
| 1699 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
| 1700 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
| 1701 | |
| 1702 +++ | |
| 1703 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
| 1704 | |
| 1705 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
| 1706 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
| 1707 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
| 1708 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
| 1709 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
| 1710 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
| 1711 | |
| 1712 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
| 1713 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
| 1714 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
| 1715 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
| 1716 | |
| 1717 +++ | |
| 1718 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
| 1719 | |
| 1720 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
| 1721 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
| 1722 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
| 1723 result string. | |
| 1724 | |
| 1725 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
| 1726 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
| 1727 | |
| 1728 Example: | |
| 1729 | |
| 1730 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
| 1731 (s2 "world")) | |
| 1732 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
| 1733 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
| 26034 | 1734 (format s1 s2)) |
| 25853 | 1735 |
| 1736 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
| 1737 | |
| 1738 +++ | |
| 1739 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
| 1740 | |
| 1741 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
| 1742 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
| 1743 argument in it. | |
| 1744 | |
| 1745 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
| 1746 (arg "world")) | |
| 1747 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
| 1748 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
| 1749 (message msg arg)) | |
| 1750 | |
| 1751 +++ | |
| 1752 ** Sound support | |
| 1753 | |
| 1754 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
| 1755 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
| 1756 | |
| 1757 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
| 1758 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
| 1759 to enable sound support. | |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
| 1762 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
| 1763 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
| 1764 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
| 1765 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
| 1766 | |
| 1767 The following sound properties are supported: | |
| 1768 | |
| 1769 - `:file FILE' | |
| 1770 | |
| 1771 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
| 1772 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
| 1773 | |
| 27148 | 1774 - `:data DATA' |
| 1775 | |
| 1776 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
| 1777 may be present, but not both. | |
| 1778 | |
| 25853 | 1779 - `:volume VOLUME' |
| 1780 | |
| 1781 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
| 1782 0..1. This property is optional. | |
| 1783 | |
| 1784 Other properties are ignored. | |
| 1785 | |
| 1786 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | |
| 26933 | 1787 |
| 1788 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
| 1789 a keyword symbol. | |
|
27145
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1790 |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1791 ** Changes to garbage collection |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1792 |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1793 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1794 of live and free strings. |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1795 |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1796 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1797 strings that have been consed so far. |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1798 |
| 25853 | 1799 |
| 1800 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 | |
| 1801 | |
| 1802 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
| 1803 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
| 1804 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
| 1805 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
| 1806 | |
| 28634 | 1807 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
| 1808 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
| 1809 | |
| 1810 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
| 1811 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
| 1812 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
| 1813 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
| 1814 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
| 1815 just display it black instead. | |
| 1816 | |
| 1817 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
| 1818 a line like | |
| 1819 | |
| 1820 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
| 1821 | |
| 1822 in your `.emacs'. | |
| 1823 | |
| 25853 | 1824 ** New face implementation. |
| 1825 | |
| 1826 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
| 1827 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
| 1828 | |
| 1829 +++ | |
| 1830 *** New faces. | |
| 1831 | |
| 1832 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
| 1833 | |
| 1834 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
| 26264 | 1835 |
| 25853 | 1836 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
| 1837 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
| 26264 | 1838 |
| 25853 | 1839 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
| 26264 | 1840 |
| 25853 | 1841 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
| 26264 | 1842 |
| 25853 | 1843 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
| 26264 | 1844 |
| 25853 | 1845 6. Foreground color. |
| 26264 | 1846 |
| 25853 | 1847 7. Background color. |
| 1848 | |
| 1849 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
| 1850 | |
| 1851 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
| 1852 | |
| 1853 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
| 1854 | |
| 1855 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
| 1856 | |
| 1857 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
| 1858 color. | |
| 1859 | |
| 1860 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
| 1861 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
| 1862 | |
| 1863 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
| 1864 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
| 1865 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
| 1866 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
| 1867 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face | |
| 1868 attributes mentioned above. | |
| 1869 | |
| 1870 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
| 1871 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
| 1872 created frames. | |
| 26264 | 1873 |
| 25853 | 1874 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
| 1875 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
| 1876 `fully-specified'. | |
| 1877 | |
| 1878 +++ | |
| 1879 *** Face merging. | |
| 1880 | |
| 1881 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
| 1882 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
| 1883 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
| 1884 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
| 1885 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
| 1886 results in a fully-specified face. | |
| 1887 | |
| 1888 +++ | |
| 1889 *** Face realization. | |
| 1890 | |
| 1891 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
| 1892 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
| 1893 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
| 1894 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
| 1895 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
| 1896 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
| 1897 | |
| 1898 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
| 1899 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
| 1900 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
| 1901 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
| 1902 | |
| 1903 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
| 1904 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
| 1905 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
| 1906 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
| 1907 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
| 1908 | |
| 1909 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
| 1910 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
| 1911 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
| 1912 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
| 1913 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
| 1914 Emacs. | |
| 1915 | |
| 1916 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
| 1917 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
| 1918 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
| 1919 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
| 1920 | |
| 1921 ++++ | |
| 1922 **** Clearing face caches. | |
| 1923 | |
| 1924 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
| 1925 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
| 1926 unused fonts. | |
| 1927 | |
| 1928 +++ | |
| 1929 *** Font selection. | |
| 26264 | 1930 |
| 25853 | 1931 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
| 1932 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
| 1933 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
| 1934 | |
| 1935 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
| 1936 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
| 1937 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
| 1938 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
| 1939 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
| 1940 | |
| 1941 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
| 1942 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
| 1943 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
| 1944 | |
| 1945 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
| 1946 | |
| 1947 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
| 1948 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
| 1949 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
| 1950 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
| 1951 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
| 1952 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
| 1953 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
| 1954 | |
| 1955 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to | |
| 1956 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a | |
| 1957 face doesn't exist. | |
| 1958 | |
| 1959 +++ | |
| 1960 **** Scalable fonts | |
| 1961 | |
| 1962 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
| 1963 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
| 1964 servers. | |
| 1965 | |
| 1966 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
| 26034 | 1967 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
| 25853 | 1968 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
| 1969 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
| 1970 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
| 1971 that list. Example: | |
| 1972 | |
| 1973 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
| 1974 | |
| 1975 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
| 1976 | |
| 1977 +++ | |
| 1978 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
| 1979 | |
| 1980 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
| 1981 | |
| 1982 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
| 1983 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
| 1984 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
| 1985 | |
| 1986 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
| 1987 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
| 1988 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
| 1989 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
| 1990 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
| 1991 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
| 1992 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
| 1993 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
| 1994 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
| 1995 of the face font sort order. | |
| 1996 | |
| 26264 | 1997 - Function: x-font-family-list |
| 25853 | 1998 |
| 1999 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
| 2000 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
| 2001 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
| 2002 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
| 2003 | |
| 2004 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
| 2005 | |
| 2006 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
| 2007 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
| 2008 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
| 2009 | |
| 2010 +++ | |
| 2011 *** Setting face attributes. | |
| 2012 | |
| 2013 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
| 2014 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
| 2015 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
| 2016 `face-attribute'. | |
| 2017 | |
| 2018 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
| 2019 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
| 2020 | |
| 2021 The following attributes are recognized: | |
| 2022 | |
| 2023 `:family' | |
| 2024 | |
| 2025 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
| 2026 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
| 2027 and `?' are allowed. | |
| 2028 | |
| 2029 `:width' | |
| 2030 | |
| 2031 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
| 2032 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
| 2033 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
| 2034 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
| 2035 | |
| 2036 `:height' | |
| 2037 | |
| 2038 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in | |
| 2039 1/10 pt. | |
| 2040 | |
| 2041 `:weight' | |
| 2042 | |
| 2043 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
| 2044 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
| 2045 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
| 2046 | |
| 2047 `:slant' | |
| 2048 | |
| 2049 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
| 2050 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
| 2051 `reverse-oblique'. | |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 `:foreground', `:background' | |
| 2054 | |
| 2055 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
| 2056 | |
| 2057 `:underline' | |
| 2058 | |
| 2059 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
| 2060 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
| 2061 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
| 2062 don't underline. | |
| 2063 | |
| 2064 `:overline' | |
| 2065 | |
| 2066 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
| 2067 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
| 2068 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
| 2069 overline. | |
| 2070 | |
| 2071 `:strike-through' | |
| 2072 | |
| 2073 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
| 2074 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
| 2075 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
| 2076 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
| 2077 | |
| 2078 `:box' | |
| 2079 | |
| 2080 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
| 2081 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
| 2082 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
| 2083 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
| 2084 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
| 2085 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
| 2086 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
| 2087 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
| 2088 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
| 2089 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
| 2090 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
| 2091 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
| 2092 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
| 2093 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
| 2094 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
| 2095 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
| 2096 box. | |
| 2097 | |
| 2098 `:inverse-video' | |
| 2099 | |
| 2100 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
| 2101 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
| 2102 | |
| 2103 `:stipple' | |
| 2104 | |
| 2105 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
| 2106 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
| 2107 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
| 2108 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
| 2109 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
| 2110 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
| 2111 | |
| 2112 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
| 2113 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
| 2114 | |
| 2115 `:font' | |
| 2116 | |
| 2117 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
| 2118 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
| 2119 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
| 2120 versions of Emacs. | |
| 2121 | |
| 2122 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
| 2123 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
| 2124 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
| 2125 | |
| 2126 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
| 2127 `defface'. | |
| 2128 | |
| 2129 *** Face attributes and X resources | |
| 2130 | |
| 2131 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
| 2132 from X resources: | |
| 2133 | |
| 2134 Face attribute X resource class | |
| 2135 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 2136 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
| 2137 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
| 2138 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
| 2139 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
| 2140 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
| 2141 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
| 2142 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
| 2143 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
| 2144 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
| 2145 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
| 2146 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
| 2147 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
| 2148 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
| 26264 | 2149 or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 25853 | 2150 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 2151 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
| 2152 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
| 2153 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
| 2154 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
| 2155 | |
| 2156 +++ | |
| 2157 *** Text property `face'. | |
| 2158 | |
| 2159 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
| 2160 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
| 2161 specification can be | |
| 2162 | |
| 2163 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
| 2164 | |
| 2165 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
| 2166 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
| 2167 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
| 2168 for face attribute names. | |
| 2169 | |
| 2170 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
| 2171 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
| 2172 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
| 2173 | |
| 2174 +++ | |
| 2175 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
| 2176 | |
|
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2177 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2178 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2179 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
| 25853 | 2180 default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
|
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2181 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
| 25853 | 2182 used to clear the mapping table. |
| 2183 | |
|
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2184 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2185 |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2186 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2187 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2188 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2189 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2190 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2191 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2192 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2193 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2194 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2195 modify their color-related behavior. |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2196 |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2197 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2198 any frame type. |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2199 |
|
27573
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2200 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2201 |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2202 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2203 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2204 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2205 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2206 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2207 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2208 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2209 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2210 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2211 |
| 25853 | 2212 +++ |
| 2213 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2214 |
| 25853 | 2215 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
| 2216 | |
| 2217 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the | |
| 2218 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | |
| 2219 Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
| 2220 | |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2221 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2222 |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2223 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2224 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2225 text-property. |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2226 |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2227 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2228 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2229 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2230 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
| 27144 | 2231 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
| 2232 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
| 2233 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
| 2234 functions. | |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2235 |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2236 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2237 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2238 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
| 25853 | 2239 |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2240 The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2241 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2242 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2243 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2244 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2245 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2246 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2247 constrained position if that is is different. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2248 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2249 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2250 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2251 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2252 constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2253 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2254 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2255 fields. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2256 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2257 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2258 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2259 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2260 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2261 only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2262 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2263 - Function: erase-field &optional POS |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2264 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2265 Erases the field surrounding POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2266 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2267 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2268 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2269 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2270 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2271 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2272 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2273 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2274 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2275 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2276 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2277 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2278 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2279 Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2280 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2281 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2282 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field, |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2283 then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2284 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2285 - Function: field-string &optional POS |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2286 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2287 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2288 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2289 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2290 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2291 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2292 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2293 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2294 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2295 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2296 |
| 25853 | 2297 +++ |
| 2298 ** Image support. | |
| 2299 | |
| 2300 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
| 2301 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
| 2302 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
| 2303 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
| 2304 | |
| 2305 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
| 2306 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
| 2307 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
| 2308 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
| 2309 area. | |
| 2310 | |
| 2311 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
| 2312 | |
| 2313 *** Image specifications | |
| 2314 | |
| 2315 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
| 2316 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
| 2317 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
| 26403 | 2318 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
| 2319 described below are ignored. | |
| 25853 | 2320 |
| 2321 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
| 2322 | |
| 2323 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
| 2324 | |
| 28789 | 2325 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
| 2326 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
| 2327 to use for its ascent. | |
| 2328 | |
| 2329 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
| 2330 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
| 2331 | |
| 2332 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered with text drawn | |
| 2333 in the same face as the image. The point the image is aligned with is | |
| 2334 the middle of the height of the face's font. That point is usually | |
| 2335 different from the font's base line. | |
| 25853 | 2336 |
| 2337 `:margin MARGIN' | |
| 2338 | |
| 26264 | 2339 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as |
| 25853 | 2340 margin around the image. Default is 0. |
| 2341 | |
| 2342 `:relief RELIEF' | |
| 2343 | |
| 2344 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
| 2345 around an image. | |
| 2346 | |
| 2347 `:algorithm ALGO' | |
| 2348 | |
| 2349 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must | |
| 2350 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is | |
| 2351 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image | |
| 2352 which is intended to display images "disabled." | |
| 2353 | |
| 2354 `:heuristic-mask BG' | |
| 2355 | |
| 2356 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the | |
| 2357 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, | |
| 2358 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 | |
| 2359 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from | |
| 2360 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must | |
| 2361 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the | |
| 2362 background of the image. | |
| 2363 | |
| 2364 `:file FILE' | |
| 2365 | |
| 2366 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
| 2367 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
| 2368 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
| 2369 may be present in the image specification. | |
| 2370 | |
|
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2371 `:data DATA' |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2372 |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2373 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2374 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2375 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2376 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2377 |
| 25853 | 2378 *** Supported image types |
| 2379 | |
| 26034 | 2380 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
| 25853 | 2381 |
| 2382 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
| 2383 properties supported are | |
| 2384 | |
| 2385 `:foreground FG' | |
| 2386 | |
| 2387 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
| 2388 is the frame's foreground. | |
| 2389 | |
| 2390 `:background FG' | |
| 2391 | |
| 2392 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
| 2393 the frame's background color. | |
| 2394 | |
| 2395 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
| 2396 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
| 2397 instead of a `:file' property. | |
| 2398 | |
| 2399 `:width WIDTH' | |
| 2400 | |
| 2401 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
| 2402 | |
| 2403 `:height HEIGHT' | |
| 2404 | |
| 2405 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
| 2406 | |
| 2407 `:data DATA' | |
| 2408 | |
| 2409 DATA must be either | |
| 2410 | |
| 2411 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
| 2412 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
| 2413 | |
| 2414 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
| 2415 | |
| 2416 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
| 2417 bitmap. | |
| 2418 | |
| 28748 | 2419 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
| 2420 height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
| 2421 in the file. | |
| 2422 | |
| 25853 | 2423 **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
| 2424 | |
| 2425 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
| 2426 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
| 2427 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
| 2428 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
| 2429 | |
| 2430 Additional image properties supported are: | |
| 2431 | |
| 2432 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
| 2433 | |
| 2434 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
| 2435 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
| 2436 name. | |
| 2437 | |
| 2438 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
| 2439 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
| 2440 | |
| 2441 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
| 2442 to display compressed images. | |
| 2443 | |
| 2444 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
| 2445 | |
| 2446 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
| 2447 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties | |
| 2448 defined. | |
| 2449 | |
| 2450 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
| 2451 | |
| 2452 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
| 27055 | 2453 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
| 2454 are: | |
| 2455 | |
| 25853 | 2456 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
| 2457 | |
| 2458 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
| 2459 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
| 2460 properties defined. | |
| 2461 | |
| 2462 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
| 2463 | |
| 2464 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
| 2465 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
| 2466 | |
| 2467 Additional image properties supported are: | |
| 2468 | |
| 2469 `:index INDEX' | |
| 2470 | |
| 2471 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
| 2472 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. | |
| 2473 | |
| 2474 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
| 2475 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
| 2476 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
| 2477 every 0.1 seconds. | |
| 2478 | |
| 2479 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
| 2480 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
| 2481 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
| 2482 | |
| 2483 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
| 2484 (when (= idx max) | |
| 2485 (setq idx 0)) | |
|
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2486 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
| 25853 | 2487 (save-excursion |
| 2488 (set-buffer buffer) | |
| 2489 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
| 2490 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
| 2491 (insert-image img "x")) | |
| 2492 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
| 2493 | |
| 2494 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
| 2495 | |
| 2496 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
| 2497 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
| 2498 properties defined. | |
| 2499 | |
| 2500 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
| 2501 | |
| 2502 Additional image properties supported are: | |
| 2503 | |
| 2504 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
| 2505 | |
| 2506 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
| 26034 | 2507 integer. This is a required property. |
| 25853 | 2508 |
| 2509 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
| 2510 | |
| 2511 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
| 26034 | 2512 must be a integer. This is an required property. |
| 25853 | 2513 |
| 2514 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
| 2515 | |
| 2516 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
| 2517 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
| 2518 files. This is an required property. | |
| 2519 | |
| 2520 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
| 2521 lisp/gs.el. | |
| 2522 | |
| 2523 *** Lisp interface. | |
| 2524 | |
| 26264 | 2525 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
| 2526 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
| 25853 | 2527 |
| 2528 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
| 2529 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
| 2530 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
| 28759 | 2531 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
| 2532 images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
| 25853 | 2533 |
| 2534 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
| 2535 | |
| 2536 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
| 2537 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
| 2538 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
| 2539 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
| 2540 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
| 2541 buffer. | |
| 2542 | |
| 2543 +++ | |
| 2544 ** Display margins. | |
| 2545 | |
| 2546 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
| 2547 and images. | |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
| 2550 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
| 2551 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
| 2552 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
| 2553 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
| 2554 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
| 2555 of the display margins. | |
| 2556 | |
| 2557 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
| 2558 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
| 2559 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
| 2560 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
| 2561 in this file). | |
| 2562 | |
| 2563 +++ | |
| 2564 ** Help display | |
| 2565 | |
| 2566 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
| 2567 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
| 2568 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
| 2569 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
| 2570 | |
| 2571 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar | |
| 2572 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display. | |
| 2573 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is | |
| 2574 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the | |
| 2575 tool-bar item is used. | |
| 2576 | |
| 2577 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
| 2578 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the | |
| 2579 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
| 2580 | |
| 2581 +++ | |
| 2582 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
| 2583 | |
| 2584 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
| 2585 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
| 2586 | |
| 2587 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
| 2588 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
| 2589 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
| 2590 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
| 2591 used. | |
| 2592 | |
| 26264 | 2593 (global-set-key [A-down] |
| 2594 #'(lambda () | |
| 25853 | 2595 (interactive) |
| 26264 | 2596 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 25853 | 2597 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
| 26264 | 2598 (global-set-key [A-up] |
| 25853 | 2599 #'(lambda () |
| 2600 (interactive) | |
| 26264 | 2601 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 25853 | 2602 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
| 2603 | |
| 2604 +++ | |
| 2605 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
| 2606 | |
| 2607 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
| 2608 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
| 2609 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
| 2610 is called with one argument, POS. | |
| 2611 | |
| 2612 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
| 2613 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
| 2614 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
| 2615 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
| 2616 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
| 2617 | |
| 2618 +++ | |
| 2619 ** Tool bar support. | |
| 2620 | |
| 2621 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
| 2622 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
| 2623 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
| 2624 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
| 2625 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
| 2626 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
| 2627 | |
| 2628 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
| 2629 | |
| 2630 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
| 2631 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
| 2632 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
| 26264 | 2633 |
| 25853 | 2634 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
| 2635 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
| 2636 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
| 2637 property (see below). | |
| 26264 | 2638 |
| 25853 | 2639 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
| 2640 binding are currently ignored. | |
| 2641 | |
| 2642 The following properties are recognized: | |
| 2643 | |
| 2644 `:enable FORM'. | |
| 26264 | 2645 |
| 25853 | 2646 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
| 2647 or disabled. | |
| 26264 | 2648 |
| 25853 | 2649 `:visible FORM' |
| 26264 | 2650 |
| 25853 | 2651 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
| 26264 | 2652 |
| 25853 | 2653 `:filter FUNCTION' |
| 2654 | |
| 2655 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
| 2656 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
| 2657 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
| 26264 | 2658 |
| 25853 | 2659 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
| 2660 | |
| 2661 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
| 2662 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
| 26264 | 2663 |
| 25853 | 2664 `:image IMAGES' |
| 2665 | |
| 2666 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
| 2667 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
| 2668 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
| 2669 | |
| 2670 Index Use when item is | |
| 2671 ---------------------------------------- | |
| 2672 0 enabled and selected | |
| 2673 1 enabled and deselected | |
| 2674 2 disabled and selected | |
| 2675 3 disabled and deselected | |
| 26264 | 2676 |
| 25853 | 2677 `:help HELP-STRING'. |
| 26264 | 2678 |
| 25853 | 2679 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
| 2680 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
| 2681 | |
| 2682 *** Tool-bar-related variables. | |
| 2683 | |
| 2684 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
| 2685 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
| 2686 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
| 2687 | |
| 26264 | 2688 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
| 25853 | 2689 raised when the mouse moves over them. |
| 2690 | |
| 2691 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
| 2692 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
| 2693 pixels. Default is 1. | |
| 2694 | |
| 2695 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
| 2696 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
| 2697 | |
| 2698 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
| 2699 | |
| 2700 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
| 26264 | 2701 a tool bar item. If |
| 25853 | 2702 |
| 2703 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
| 2704 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
| 2705 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
| 2706 | |
| 2707 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
| 2708 | |
| 2709 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
| 2710 | |
| 2711 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
| 2712 item. | |
| 2713 | |
| 2714 ** Mode line changes. | |
| 2715 | |
| 2716 +++ | |
| 2717 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
| 2718 | |
| 2719 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
| 2720 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
| 2721 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
| 2722 | |
| 2723 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
| 2724 a `local-map' text property. | |
| 2725 | |
| 2726 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
| 2727 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
| 2728 | |
| 2729 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
| 2730 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
| 2731 `local-map' property. | |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
| 2734 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
| 2735 example. | |
| 2736 | |
|
26359
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2737 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
|
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2738 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
|
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2739 |
| 25853 | 2740 +++ |
| 2741 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
| 2742 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
| 2743 | |
| 2744 +++ | |
| 2745 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
| 2748 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
| 2749 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
| 2750 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
| 2751 line. | |
| 2752 | |
| 2753 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
| 2754 `header-line'. | |
| 2755 | |
| 2756 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
| 2757 position in the header-line. | |
| 2758 | |
| 2759 +++ | |
| 2760 ** Text property `display' | |
| 2761 | |
| 2762 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and | |
| 2763 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the | |
| 2764 `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
| 2765 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | |
| 2766 | |
| 2767 *** Variable width and height spaces | |
| 2768 | |
| 2769 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
| 2770 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
| 2771 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
| 2772 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
| 2773 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
| 2774 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
| 2775 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
| 2776 | |
| 2777 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
| 2778 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
| 2779 properties described below. | |
| 2780 | |
| 2781 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
| 2782 characters having the `display' property. | |
| 2783 | |
| 2784 - :width WIDTH | |
| 2785 | |
| 2786 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
| 2787 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
| 2788 | |
| 2789 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
| 2790 | |
| 2791 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
| 2792 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
| 2793 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
| 2794 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
| 2795 | |
| 2796 - :align-to HPOS | |
| 2797 | |
| 2798 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
| 2799 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
| 2800 | |
| 2801 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
| 2802 | |
| 2803 - :height HEIGHT | |
| 2804 | |
| 2805 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
| 2806 normal line height. | |
| 2807 | |
| 2808 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
| 2809 | |
| 2810 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
| 2811 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
| 2812 | |
| 2813 - :ascent ASCENT | |
| 2814 | |
| 2815 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
| 2816 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
| 2817 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
| 2818 equal to 100. | |
| 2819 | |
| 2820 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
| 2821 | |
| 2822 *** Images | |
| 2823 | |
| 2824 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
| 2825 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
| 2826 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
| 2827 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
| 2828 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
| 2829 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
| 2830 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
| 2831 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
| 2832 as display specification. | |
| 2833 | |
| 2834 *** Other display properties | |
| 2835 | |
| 2836 - :space-width FACTOR | |
| 2837 | |
| 2838 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
| 2839 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
| 2840 integer or float. | |
| 2841 | |
| 2842 - :height HEIGHT | |
| 2843 | |
| 2844 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
| 2845 | |
| 2846 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
| 2847 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
| 2848 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
| 2849 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
| 2850 a font is available counts as a step. | |
| 2851 | |
| 2852 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
| 2853 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
| 2854 | |
| 2855 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
| 2856 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
| 2857 | |
| 2858 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
| 2859 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
| 2860 | |
| 2861 - :raise FACTOR | |
| 2862 | |
| 2863 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
| 2864 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
| 2865 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
| 2866 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
| 2867 `:height' subproperty. | |
| 2868 | |
| 2869 *** Conditional display properties | |
| 2870 | |
| 2871 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
| 2872 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
| 2873 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
| 2874 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of | |
| 2875 the text having the `display' property. | |
| 2876 | |
| 2877 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
| 2878 `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
| 2879 | |
| 2880 +++ | |
| 2881 ** New menu separator types. | |
| 2882 | |
| 2883 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
| 2884 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
| 2885 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
| 2886 to specify other menu separator types. | |
| 2887 | |
| 2888 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
| 2889 | |
| 2890 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
| 2891 separator occurs. | |
| 2892 | |
| 2893 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
| 2894 | |
| 2895 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 2896 | |
| 2897 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
| 2898 | |
| 2899 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 2900 | |
| 2901 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
| 2902 | |
| 2903 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 2904 | |
| 2905 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
| 2906 | |
| 2907 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 2908 | |
| 2909 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
| 2910 | |
| 2911 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form | |
| 2912 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | |
| 2913 | |
| 2914 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
| 2915 | |
| 2916 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
| 2917 | |
| 2918 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
| 2919 | |
| 2920 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
| 2921 | |
| 2922 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
| 2923 | |
| 2924 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
| 2925 | |
| 2926 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
| 2927 | |
| 2928 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
| 2929 | |
| 2930 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
| 2931 | |
| 2932 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
| 2933 | |
| 2934 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
| 2935 | |
| 2936 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
| 2937 | |
| 2938 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
| 2939 | |
| 2940 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
| 2941 | |
| 2942 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
| 2943 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
| 2944 | |
| 2945 +++ | |
| 2946 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
| 2947 | |
| 2948 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
| 2949 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
| 2950 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
| 2951 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
| 2952 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
| 2953 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
| 2954 default foreground is black. | |
| 2955 | |
| 2956 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
| 2957 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
| 2958 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
| 2959 | |
| 2960 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
| 2961 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
| 2962 | |
| 2963 +++ | |
| 2964 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
| 2965 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
| 2966 | |
| 2967 --- | |
| 2968 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
| 2969 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
| 2970 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
| 2971 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
| 2972 the original window start. | |
| 2973 | |
| 2974 --- | |
| 2975 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
| 2976 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
| 2977 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
| 2978 | |
| 2979 +++ | |
| 2980 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
| 2981 | |
| 2982 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
| 2983 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
| 2984 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
| 2985 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
| 2986 | |
| 2987 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
| 2988 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
| 2989 | |
| 2990 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
| 2991 | |
| 2992 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
| 2993 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
| 2994 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
| 2995 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
| 2996 temporarily to nil, for example | |
| 2997 | |
| 2998 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
| 2999 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
| 3000 | |
| 26264 | 3001 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
| 25853 | 3002 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
|
28094
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3003 |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3004 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3005 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3006 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3007 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3008 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3009 support a vertical-bar cursor). |
| 26652 | 3010 ^L |
| 3011 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
| 3012 | |
| 3013 ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
| 3014 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
| 25853 | 3015 |
| 3016 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
| 3017 | |
| 3018 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
| 3019 | |
| 3020 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
| 3021 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
| 3022 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
| 3023 | |
| 3024 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
| 3025 is the one that is used. | |
| 3026 | |
| 3027 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
| 3028 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
| 3029 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
| 3030 separate from the command's regular output. | |
| 3031 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
| 3032 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
| 3033 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
| 3034 the buffer name. | |
| 3035 | |
| 3036 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
| 3037 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
| 3038 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
| 3039 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
| 3040 | |
| 3041 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
| 3042 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
| 3043 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
| 3044 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
| 3045 | |
| 3046 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
| 3047 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
| 3048 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
| 3049 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
| 3052 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
| 3053 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
| 3054 they never ignore case. | |
| 3055 | |
| 3056 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
| 3057 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
| 3058 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
| 3059 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
| 3060 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
| 3061 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
| 3062 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
| 3063 | |
| 3064 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
| 3065 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
| 3066 | |
| 3067 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
| 3068 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
| 3069 | |
| 3070 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
| 3071 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
| 3072 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
| 3073 | |
| 3074 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
| 3075 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
| 3076 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
| 3077 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
| 3078 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
| 3079 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
| 3080 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
| 3081 | |
| 3082 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
| 3083 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
| 3084 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
| 3085 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
| 3086 | |
| 3087 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
| 3088 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
| 3089 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
| 3090 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
| 3091 | |
| 3092 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
| 3093 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
| 3094 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
| 3095 | |
| 3096 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
| 3097 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
| 3098 doesn't have any effect. | |
| 3099 | |
| 3100 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
| 3101 not one per buffer. | |
| 3102 | |
| 3103 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
| 3104 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
| 3105 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
| 3106 | |
| 3107 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
| 3108 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
| 3109 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
| 3110 | |
| 3111 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
| 3112 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
| 3113 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
| 3114 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
| 3115 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
| 3116 | |
| 3117 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
| 3118 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
| 3119 | |
| 3120 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
| 3121 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
| 3122 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
| 3123 | |
| 3124 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
| 3125 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
| 3126 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
| 3127 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
| 3128 | |
| 3129 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
| 3130 | |
| 3131 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
| 3132 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
| 3133 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
| 3134 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
| 3135 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
| 3136 | |
| 3137 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
| 3138 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
| 3139 | |
| 3140 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
| 3141 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
| 3142 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
| 3143 `?' on other systems. | |
| 3144 | |
| 3145 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
| 3146 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
| 3147 Unix. | |
| 3148 | |
| 3149 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
| 3150 current codepage when it starts. | |
| 3151 | |
| 3152 ** Mail changes | |
| 3153 | |
| 28051 | 3154 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if |
| 3155 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
| 3156 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
| 3157 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
| 3158 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
| 3159 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
| 3160 latin-1: | |
| 3161 | |
| 3162 MIME-version: 1.0 | |
| 3163 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
| 3164 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
| 3165 | |
| 25853 | 3166 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
| 3167 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
| 3168 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
| 3169 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
| 3170 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
| 3171 | |
| 3172 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
| 3173 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
| 3174 mail. | |
| 3175 | |
| 3176 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
| 3177 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
| 3178 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
| 3179 list of possible coding systems. | |
| 3180 | |
| 3181 ** CC Mode changes | |
| 3182 | |
| 3183 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
| 3184 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
| 3185 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
| 3186 docstring for details. | |
| 3187 | |
| 3188 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
| 3189 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
| 3190 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
| 3191 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
| 3192 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
| 3193 | |
| 3194 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
| 3195 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
| 3196 | |
| 3197 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
| 3198 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
| 3199 | |
| 3200 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
| 3201 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
| 3202 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
| 3203 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
| 3204 anonymous classes. | |
| 3205 | |
| 3206 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
| 3207 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
| 3208 | |
| 3209 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
| 3210 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
| 3211 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
| 3212 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
| 3213 | |
| 3214 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
| 3215 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
| 3216 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
| 3217 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
| 3218 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
| 3219 | |
| 3220 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
| 3221 | |
| 3222 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
| 3223 | |
| 3224 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
| 3225 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
| 3226 | |
| 3227 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
| 3228 | |
| 3229 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
| 3230 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
| 3231 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
| 3232 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
| 3233 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
| 3234 | |
| 3235 ** Gnus changes. | |
| 3236 | |
| 3237 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
| 3238 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
| 3239 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
| 3240 | |
| 3241 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
| 3242 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
| 3243 group, which is created automatically. | |
| 3244 | |
| 3245 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
| 3246 values. | |
| 3247 | |
| 3248 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
| 3249 | |
| 3250 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
| 3251 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
| 3252 | |
| 3253 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
| 3254 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
| 3255 | |
| 3256 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
| 3257 | |
| 3258 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
| 3259 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
| 3260 | |
| 3261 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
| 3262 | |
| 3263 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
| 3264 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
| 3265 | |
| 3266 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
| 3267 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
| 3268 | |
| 3269 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
| 3270 control over simplification. | |
| 3271 | |
| 3272 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
| 3273 | |
| 3274 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
| 3275 limit. | |
| 3276 | |
| 3277 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
| 3278 | |
| 3279 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
| 3280 | |
| 26264 | 3281 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
| 25853 | 3282 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
| 3283 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
| 3284 | |
| 3285 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | |
| 3286 `a' forces normal posting method. | |
| 3287 | |
| 3288 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
| 3289 -- `W d'. | |
| 3290 | |
| 3291 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
| 3292 to a non-nil value. | |
| 3293 | |
| 3294 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
| 3295 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
| 3296 | |
| 3297 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
| 3298 has been added. | |
| 3299 | |
| 3300 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
| 3301 | |
| 3302 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
| 3303 | |
| 3304 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
| 3305 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
| 3306 | |
| 3307 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
| 3308 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
| 3309 | |
| 3310 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
| 3311 | |
| 3312 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
| 3313 been added. | |
| 3314 | |
| 3315 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
| 3316 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
| 3317 | |
| 3318 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
| 3319 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
| 3320 | |
| 3321 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
| 3322 | |
| 3323 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
| 3324 | |
| 3325 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
| 3326 | |
| 3327 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
| 3328 | |
| 3329 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
| 3330 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
| 3331 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
| 3332 | |
| 3333 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
| 3334 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
| 3335 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
| 3336 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
| 3337 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
| 3338 | |
| 3339 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
| 3340 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
| 3341 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
| 3342 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
| 3343 | |
| 3344 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
| 3345 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
| 3346 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
| 3347 mismatch. | |
| 3348 | |
| 3349 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
| 3350 | |
| 3351 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
| 3352 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
| 3353 | |
| 3354 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
| 3355 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
| 3356 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
| 3357 removed from the label. | |
| 3358 | |
| 3359 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
| 3360 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
| 3361 | |
| 3362 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
| 3363 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
| 3364 | |
| 3365 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
| 3366 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
| 26264 | 3367 expressions. |
| 25853 | 3368 |
| 3369 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
| 3370 | |
| 3371 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
| 3372 | |
| 3373 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
| 3374 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
| 3375 | |
| 3376 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
| 3377 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
| 3378 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
| 3379 | |
| 3380 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
| 3381 changes with a special face. | |
| 3382 | |
| 3383 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
| 3384 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
| 3385 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
| 3386 | |
| 3387 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
| 3388 | |
| 3389 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
| 3390 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
| 3391 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
| 3392 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
| 3393 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
| 3394 | |
| 3395 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
| 3396 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
| 3397 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
| 3398 | |
| 3399 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
| 3400 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
| 3401 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
| 3402 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
| 3403 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
| 3404 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
| 3405 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
| 3406 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
| 3407 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
| 3408 | |
| 3409 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
| 3410 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
| 3411 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
| 3412 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
| 3413 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
| 3414 program. | |
| 3415 | |
| 3416 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
| 3417 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
| 3418 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
| 3419 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
| 3420 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
| 3421 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
| 3422 | |
| 3423 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
| 3424 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
| 3425 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
| 3426 was not documented clearly before. | |
| 3427 | |
| 3428 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
| 3429 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
| 3430 | |
| 3431 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
| 3432 | |
| 3433 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
| 3434 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
| 3435 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
| 3436 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
| 3437 | |
| 3438 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
| 3439 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
| 3440 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
| 3441 | |
| 3442 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
| 3445 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
| 3446 | |
| 3447 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
| 3448 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
| 3449 integers. | |
| 3450 | |
| 3451 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
| 3452 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
| 3453 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
| 3454 file names and attributes are returned. | |
| 3455 | |
| 3456 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
| 3457 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
| 3458 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. | |
| 3459 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | |
| 3460 returns the result. | |
| 3461 | |
| 3462 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
| 3463 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
| 3464 | |
| 3465 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
| 3466 | |
| 3467 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
| 3468 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
| 3469 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
| 3470 optionally. | |
| 3471 | |
| 3472 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
| 3473 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
| 3474 | |
| 3475 ** | |
| 3476 The new function process-running-child-p | |
| 3477 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
| 3478 terminal to its own child process. | |
| 3479 | |
| 3480 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
| 3481 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
| 3482 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
| 3483 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
| 3484 | |
| 3485 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
| 3486 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
| 3487 | |
| 3488 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
| 3489 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
| 3490 | |
| 3491 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
| 3492 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
| 3493 to move or copy menu entries. | |
| 3494 | |
| 3495 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
| 3496 | |
| 3497 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
| 3498 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
| 3499 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
| 3500 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
| 3501 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
| 3502 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
| 3503 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
| 3504 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
| 3505 | |
| 3506 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
| 3507 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
| 3508 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
| 3509 | |
| 3510 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
| 3511 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
| 3512 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
| 3513 | |
| 3514 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted | |
| 3515 | |
| 3516 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
| 3517 across the boundary. | |
| 3518 | |
| 3519 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
| 3520 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
| 3521 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
| 3522 contains 8-bit characters. | |
| 3523 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
| 3524 contains invalid characters. | |
| 3525 | |
| 3526 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
| 3527 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
| 3528 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
| 3529 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
| 3530 way. | |
| 3531 | |
| 3532 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
| 3533 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
| 3534 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
| 3535 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
| 3536 | |
| 3537 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
| 3538 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
| 3539 | |
| 3540 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
| 3541 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
| 3542 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
| 3543 menus should always use the third argument. | |
| 3544 | |
| 3545 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
| 3546 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
| 3547 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
| 3548 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
| 3549 | |
| 3550 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
| 3551 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
| 3552 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
| 3553 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
| 3554 | |
| 3555 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
| 3556 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
| 3557 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
| 3558 echo area contents. | |
| 3559 | |
| 3560 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
| 3561 | |
| 3562 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
| 3563 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
| 3564 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
| 3565 | |
| 3566 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
| 3567 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
| 26264 | 3568 means to clear out that attribute. |
| 25853 | 3569 |
| 3570 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
| 3571 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
| 3572 | |
| 3573 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
| 3574 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
| 3575 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
| 3576 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
| 3577 | |
| 3578 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
| 3579 the gap of the current buffer. | |
| 3580 | |
| 3581 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
| 3582 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
| 3583 current buffer. | |
| 3584 | |
| 3585 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
| 3586 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
| 3587 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
| 3588 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
| 3589 | |
| 3590 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
| 3591 | |
| 3592 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
| 3593 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
| 3594 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
| 3595 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
| 3596 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
| 3597 | |
| 3598 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
| 3599 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
| 3600 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
| 3601 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
| 3602 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
| 3603 | |
| 3604 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
| 3605 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
| 3606 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
| 3607 | |
| 3608 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
| 3609 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
| 3610 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
| 3611 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
| 3612 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
| 3613 results. | |
| 3614 | |
| 3615 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
| 3616 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
| 3617 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
| 3618 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
| 3619 | |
| 3620 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
| 3621 | |
| 3622 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
| 3623 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
| 3624 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
| 3625 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
| 3626 | |
| 3627 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
| 3628 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
| 3629 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
| 3630 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
| 3631 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
| 3632 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
| 3633 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
| 3634 region. | |
| 3635 | |
| 3636 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
| 3637 selective undo. | |
| 3638 | |
| 3639 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
| 3640 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
| 3641 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
| 3642 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
| 3643 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
| 3644 | |
| 3645 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
| 3646 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
| 3647 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
| 3648 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
| 3649 | |
| 3650 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
| 3651 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
| 3652 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
| 3653 something that most users not do. | |
| 3654 | |
| 3655 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
| 3656 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
| 3657 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
| 3658 applications. | |
| 3659 | |
| 3660 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
| 3661 pasting operations. | |
| 3662 | |
| 3663 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
| 3664 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
| 3665 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
| 3666 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
| 3667 `ps-printer-name'. | |
| 3668 | |
| 3669 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
| 3670 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
| 3671 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
| 3672 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
| 3673 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
| 3674 hits a new word. | |
| 3675 | |
| 3676 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
| 3677 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
| 3678 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
| 3679 | |
| 3680 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
| 3681 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
| 3682 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
| 3683 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
| 3684 | |
| 3685 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
| 3686 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
| 3687 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
| 3688 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
| 3689 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
| 3690 | |
| 3691 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
| 3692 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
| 3693 | |
| 3694 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
| 3695 | |
| 3696 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
| 3697 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
| 3698 respectively. | |
| 3699 | |
| 3700 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
| 3701 | |
| 3702 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
| 3703 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
| 3704 | |
| 3705 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
| 3706 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
| 3707 | |
| 3708 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
| 3709 | |
| 3710 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
| 3711 | |
| 3712 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
| 3713 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
| 3714 | |
| 3715 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
| 26264 | 3716 given in the following case: |
| 25853 | 3717 o When you are using a complex input method. |
| 3718 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
| 3719 | |
| 3720 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
| 3721 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
| 3722 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
| 3723 setting it to t is helpful. | |
| 3724 | |
| 3725 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
| 3726 | |
| 3727 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
| 3728 keys: | |
| 3729 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
| 3730 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
| 3731 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
| 3732 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
| 3733 environment. | |
| 3734 | |
| 3735 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
| 3736 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
| 3737 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
| 3738 get | |
| 3739 | |
| 3740 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
| 3741 | |
| 3742 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
| 3743 | |
| 3744 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
| 3745 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
| 3746 | |
| 3747 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
| 3748 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
| 3749 its owner and group. | |
| 3750 | |
| 3751 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
| 3752 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
| 3753 | |
| 3754 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
| 3755 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
| 3756 | |
| 3757 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
| 3758 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
| 3759 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
| 3760 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
| 3761 | |
| 3762 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
| 3763 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
| 3764 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
| 3765 for writing keyboard macros. | |
| 3766 | |
| 3767 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
| 3768 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
| 3769 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
| 3770 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
| 3771 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
| 3772 info. | |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
| 3775 | |
| 3776 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
| 3777 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
| 3778 contents only. | |
| 3779 | |
| 3780 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
| 3781 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
| 3782 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
| 3783 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
| 3784 | |
| 3785 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
| 3786 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
| 3787 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
| 3788 | |
| 3789 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
| 3790 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
| 3791 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
| 3792 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
| 3793 | |
| 3794 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
| 3795 failure if the command produces no output. | |
| 3796 | |
| 3797 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
| 3798 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
| 3799 the mouse. | |
| 3800 | |
| 3801 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
| 3802 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
| 3803 function and variable names. | |
| 3804 | |
| 3805 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
| 3806 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
| 3807 file-coding-system-alist. | |
| 3808 | |
| 3809 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
| 3810 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
| 3811 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
| 3812 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
| 3813 according to the current fontset. | |
| 3814 | |
| 3815 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
| 3816 | |
| 3817 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
| 3818 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
| 3819 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
| 3820 | |
| 3821 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
| 3822 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
| 3823 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
| 3824 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
| 3825 | |
| 3826 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
| 3827 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
| 3828 | |
| 3829 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
| 3830 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
| 3831 | |
| 3832 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
| 3833 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
| 3834 command keys. | |
| 3835 | |
| 3836 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
| 3837 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
| 3838 | |
| 3839 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
| 3840 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
| 3841 all variables that have documentation. | |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
| 3844 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
| 3845 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
| 3846 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
| 3847 it should show; the default is 20. | |
| 3848 | |
| 3849 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
| 3850 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
| 3851 of your input. | |
| 3852 | |
| 3853 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
| 3854 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
| 3855 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
| 3856 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
| 3857 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
| 3858 Newly added options are included as well. | |
| 3859 | |
| 3860 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
| 3861 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
| 3862 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
| 3863 | |
| 3864 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
| 3865 Customize menu. | |
| 3866 | |
| 3867 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
| 3868 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
| 3869 | |
| 3870 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
| 3871 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
| 3872 invoked. | |
| 3873 | |
| 3874 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
| 3875 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
| 3876 The default is 1. | |
| 3877 | |
| 3878 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
| 3879 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
| 3880 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
| 3881 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
| 3882 sensibly. | |
| 3883 | |
| 3884 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
| 3885 | |
| 3886 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
| 3887 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
| 3888 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
| 3889 | |
| 3890 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
| 3891 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
| 3892 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
| 3893 every night. | |
| 3894 | |
| 28724 | 3895 ** Desktop changes |
| 3896 | |
| 3897 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
| 25853 | 3898 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. |
| 3899 | |
| 28724 | 3900 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored |
| 3901 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
| 3902 | |
| 25853 | 3903 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to |
| 3904 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
| 3905 | |
| 3906 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
| 3907 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
| 3908 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
| 3909 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
| 3910 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
| 26264 | 3911 made invisible again. |
| 25853 | 3912 |
| 3913 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
| 3914 | |
| 3915 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
| 3916 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
| 3917 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
| 3918 toggle. | |
| 3919 | |
| 3920 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
| 3921 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
| 3922 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
| 3923 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
| 3924 rmail-default-body-file. | |
| 3925 | |
| 3926 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
| 3927 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
| 3928 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
| 3929 | |
| 3930 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
| 3931 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
| 3932 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
| 3933 | |
| 3934 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
| 3935 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
| 3936 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
| 3937 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
| 3938 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
| 3939 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
| 3940 | |
| 3941 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
| 3942 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
| 3943 provided by feedmail are: | |
| 3944 | |
| 3945 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
| 3946 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
| 3947 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
| 3948 | |
| 3949 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
| 3950 be prompted for confirmation | |
| 3951 | |
| 3952 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
| 3953 | |
| 3954 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
| 3955 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
| 3956 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
| 3957 | |
| 3958 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
| 3959 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
| 3960 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
| 3961 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
| 3962 | |
| 3963 ** Dired changes | |
| 3964 | |
| 3965 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
| 3966 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
| 3967 | |
| 3968 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
| 3969 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
| 3970 | |
| 3971 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
| 3972 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
| 3973 for a specified regexp. | |
| 3974 | |
| 3975 ** VC Changes | |
| 3976 | |
| 3977 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
| 3978 conveniently. | |
| 3979 | |
| 3980 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
| 3981 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
| 3982 Dired. | |
| 3983 | |
| 3984 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
| 3985 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
| 3986 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
| 3987 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
| 3988 | |
| 3989 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
| 3990 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
| 3991 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
| 3992 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
| 3993 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
| 3994 | |
| 3995 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
| 3996 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
| 3997 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
| 3998 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
| 3999 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
| 4000 | |
| 4001 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
| 4002 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
| 26264 | 4003 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
| 25853 | 4004 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
| 4005 | |
| 4006 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
| 4007 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
| 4008 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
| 4009 | |
| 4010 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
| 4011 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
| 4012 session to resolve them. | |
| 4013 | |
| 4014 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
| 4015 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
| 4016 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
| 4017 uses as well). | |
| 4018 | |
| 4019 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
| 4020 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
| 4021 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
| 4022 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
| 4023 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
| 4024 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
| 4025 using ediff. | |
| 4026 | |
| 4027 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
| 4028 | |
| 4029 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
| 4030 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
| 4031 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
| 4032 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
| 4033 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
| 4034 | |
| 4035 ** Frame name display changes | |
| 4036 | |
| 4037 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
| 4038 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
| 4039 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
| 4040 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
| 4041 | |
| 4042 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
| 4043 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
| 4044 menu. | |
| 4045 | |
| 4046 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
| 4047 | |
| 4048 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
| 4049 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
| 4050 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
| 4051 | |
| 4052 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
| 4053 | |
| 4054 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
| 4055 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
| 4056 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
| 4057 | |
| 4058 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
| 4059 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
| 4060 the following line. | |
| 4061 | |
| 4062 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
| 4063 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
| 4064 previously sent input. | |
| 4065 | |
| 4066 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
| 4067 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
| 4068 as the search string. | |
| 4069 | |
| 4070 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
| 4071 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
| 4072 | |
| 4073 ** C mode changes | |
| 4074 | |
| 4075 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
| 4076 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
| 4077 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
| 26264 | 4078 definition. |
| 25853 | 4079 |
| 4080 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
| 4081 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
| 4082 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
| 4083 style is still the default however. | |
| 4084 | |
| 4085 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
| 4086 | |
| 4087 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
| 4088 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
| 4089 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
| 4090 | |
| 4091 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
| 4092 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
| 4093 | |
| 4094 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
| 4095 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
| 4096 | |
| 4097 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
| 4098 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
| 4099 | |
| 4100 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
| 4101 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
| 4102 | |
| 4103 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
| 4104 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
| 4105 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
| 4106 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
| 4107 | |
| 4108 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
| 4109 | |
| 26264 | 4110 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
| 25853 | 4111 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
| 4112 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
| 4113 | |
| 4114 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
| 4115 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
| 4116 expanding dynamically. | |
| 4117 | |
| 4118 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
| 4119 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
| 4120 | |
| 4121 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
| 4122 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
| 4123 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
| 4124 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
| 4125 | |
| 4126 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 4129 | |
| 4130 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
| 4131 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
| 4132 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
| 4133 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
| 4134 against the first word in the title. | |
| 4135 | |
| 4136 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
| 4137 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
| 4138 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
| 26264 | 4139 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
| 25853 | 4140 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
| 26264 | 4141 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
| 25853 | 4142 |
| 4143 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
| 4144 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
| 4145 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
| 4146 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
| 4147 | |
| 4148 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
| 4149 | |
| 4150 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
| 4151 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
| 4152 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
| 4153 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
| 4154 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
| 4155 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
| 4156 | |
| 4157 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
| 4158 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
| 4159 | |
| 4160 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
| 4161 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
| 4162 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. | |
| 4163 | |
| 4164 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
| 4165 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
| 4166 | |
| 4167 ** Ispell changes. | |
| 4168 | |
| 26264 | 4169 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
| 4170 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
| 25853 | 4171 are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
| 4172 | |
| 4173 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
| 4174 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
| 4175 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
| 4176 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
| 26264 | 4177 include: |
| 25853 | 4178 |
| 4179 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
| 4180 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
| 4181 | |
| 4182 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
| 4183 | |
| 4184 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
| 4185 | |
| 4186 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
| 4187 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
| 4188 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
| 4189 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
| 4190 | |
| 4191 *** New recursive parser. | |
| 4192 | |
| 4193 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
| 4194 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
| 4195 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
| 4196 | |
| 4197 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
| 26264 | 4198 |
| 25853 | 4199 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
| 4200 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
| 4201 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
| 4202 | |
| 4203 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
| 4204 | |
| 4205 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
| 4206 | |
| 4207 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
| 4208 | |
| 4209 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
| 4210 | |
| 4211 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
| 4212 | |
| 4213 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
| 4214 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
| 4215 | |
| 4216 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
| 4217 | |
| 4218 *** References to external documents. | |
| 4219 | |
| 4220 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
| 4221 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
| 4222 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
| 4223 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
| 4224 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
| 4225 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
| 4226 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
| 4227 | |
| 4228 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
| 4229 | |
| 4230 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | |
| 4231 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | |
| 4232 | |
| 4233 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
| 4234 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
| 4235 | |
| 4236 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
| 4237 | |
| 4238 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
| 4239 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
| 4240 | |
| 4241 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
| 4242 | |
| 4243 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
| 4244 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
| 4245 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
| 4246 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
| 4247 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
| 4248 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
| 4249 more. | |
| 4250 | |
| 4251 *** Support for the varioref package | |
| 4252 | |
| 4253 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
| 4254 | |
| 4255 *** New hooks | |
| 4256 | |
| 4257 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
| 4258 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
| 4259 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
| 4260 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
| 4261 | |
| 4262 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
| 4263 | |
| 4264 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
| 4265 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
| 4266 | |
| 4267 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
| 4268 | |
| 4269 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
| 4270 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
| 4271 fontified, use | |
| 4272 | |
| 4273 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
| 4274 | |
| 4275 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
| 4276 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
| 4277 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
| 4278 directories that contain the same file name. | |
| 4279 | |
| 4280 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
| 4281 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
| 4282 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
| 4283 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
| 4284 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
| 4285 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
| 4286 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
| 4287 directory. | |
| 4288 | |
| 4289 ** New modes and packages | |
| 4290 | |
| 4291 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
| 4292 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
| 4293 it, but some do not. | |
| 4294 | |
| 4295 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
| 4296 code. | |
| 4297 | |
| 4298 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
| 4299 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
| 4300 around in a buffer. | |
| 4301 | |
| 4302 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
| 4303 | |
| 4304 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
| 4305 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
| 4306 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
| 4307 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
| 4308 | |
| 4309 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
| 4310 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
| 4311 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
| 4312 | |
| 4313 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
| 4314 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
| 4315 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
| 4316 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
| 4317 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
| 4318 the like. | |
| 4319 | |
| 4320 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
| 4321 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
| 4322 | |
| 4323 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
| 4324 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
| 4325 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
| 4326 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
| 4327 | |
| 4328 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
| 4329 | |
| 4330 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
| 4331 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
| 4332 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
| 4333 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
| 4334 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
| 4335 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
| 4336 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
| 4337 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
| 4338 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
| 4339 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
| 4340 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
| 4341 | |
| 4342 Platform-specific modes: | |
| 4343 | |
| 4344 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
| 4345 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
| 4346 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
| 4347 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
| 4348 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
| 4349 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
| 4350 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
| 4351 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
| 4352 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
| 4353 | |
| 4354 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
| 4355 | |
| 4356 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
| 4357 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
| 4358 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
| 4359 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
| 4360 | |
| 4361 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
| 4362 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
| 4363 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
| 4364 | |
| 4365 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
| 4366 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
| 4367 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
| 4368 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
| 4369 | |
| 4370 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
| 4371 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
| 4372 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
| 4373 environment. | |
| 4374 | |
| 4375 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
| 4376 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
| 4377 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
| 4378 current input method for reading this one event. | |
| 4379 | |
| 4380 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
| 4381 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
| 4382 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
| 4383 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
| 4384 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
| 4385 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
| 4386 | |
| 4387 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
| 4388 | |
| 4389 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
| 4390 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
| 4391 | |
| 4392 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
| 4393 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
| 4394 always increases point by 1. | |
| 4395 | |
| 4396 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
| 4397 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
| 4398 | |
| 4399 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
| 4400 | |
| 4401 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
| 4402 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
| 4403 default value changed. For example, | |
| 4404 | |
| 4405 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
| 4406 :type 'integer | |
| 4407 :group 'foo | |
| 4408 :version "20.3") | |
| 4409 | |
| 26264 | 4410 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
| 25853 | 4411 :version "20.3") |
| 4412 | |
| 4413 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
| 4414 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
| 4415 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
| 4416 `:version' in the top level group. | |
| 4417 | |
| 4418 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
| 4419 | |
| 4420 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
| 4421 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
| 4422 | |
| 4423 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
| 4424 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
| 4425 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
| 4426 to themselves. | |
| 4427 | |
| 4428 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
| 4429 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
| 4430 values whatever. | |
| 4431 | |
| 4432 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
| 4433 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
| 4434 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
| 4435 | |
| 4436 ** Frame-local variables. | |
| 4437 | |
| 4438 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
| 4439 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
| 4440 local bindings for that variable. | |
| 4441 | |
| 4442 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
| 4443 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
| 4444 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
| 4445 parameter name. | |
| 4446 | |
| 4447 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
| 4448 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
| 4449 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
| 4450 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
| 4451 | |
| 4452 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
| 4453 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
| 4454 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
| 4455 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
| 4456 | |
| 4457 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
| 4458 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
| 4459 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
| 4460 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
| 4461 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
| 4462 | |
| 4463 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
| 4464 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
| 4465 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
| 4466 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
| 4467 | |
| 4468 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
| 4469 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
| 4470 | |
| 4471 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
| 4472 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
| 4473 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
| 4474 | |
| 4475 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
| 4476 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
| 4477 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
| 4478 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
| 4479 | |
| 4480 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
| 4481 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
| 4482 empty input. | |
| 4483 | |
| 4484 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
| 4485 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
| 4486 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
| 4487 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
| 4488 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
| 4489 | |
| 4490 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
| 4491 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
| 4492 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
| 4493 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
| 4494 | |
| 4495 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
| 4496 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
| 4497 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
| 4498 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
| 4499 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
| 4500 | |
| 4501 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
| 4502 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
| 4503 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
| 4504 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
| 4505 | |
| 4506 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
| 4507 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
| 4508 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
| 4509 | |
| 4510 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
| 4511 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
| 4512 was directed to display this buffer. | |
| 4513 | |
| 4514 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
| 4515 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
| 4516 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
| 4517 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
| 4518 set-window-configuration. | |
| 4519 | |
| 4520 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
| 4521 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
| 4522 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
| 4523 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
| 4524 | |
| 4525 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
| 4526 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
| 4527 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
| 4528 | |
| 4529 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
| 4530 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
| 4531 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
| 4532 | |
| 4533 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
| 4534 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
| 4535 | |
| 4536 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
| 4537 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
| 4538 | |
| 4539 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
| 4540 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
| 4541 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
| 4542 | |
| 4543 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
| 4544 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
| 4545 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
| 4546 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
| 4547 | |
| 4548 ** Menu changes | |
| 4549 | |
| 4550 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
| 4551 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
| 4552 better supported. | |
| 4553 | |
| 4554 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
| 4555 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
| 4556 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
| 4557 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
| 4558 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
| 4559 | |
| 4560 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
| 4561 | |
| 4562 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
| 4563 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
| 4564 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
| 4565 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
| 4566 | |
| 4567 The format is: | |
| 4568 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
| 4569 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
| 4570 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
| 4571 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
| 4572 The supported properties include | |
| 4573 | |
| 4574 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
| 4575 item is enabled. | |
| 4576 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
| 4577 item should appear in the menu. | |
| 26264 | 4578 :filter FILTER-FN |
| 25853 | 4579 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
| 4580 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
| 4581 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
| 4582 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
| 4583 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
| 4584 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | |
| 4585 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | |
| 4586 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
| 4587 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
| 4588 keyboard binding. | |
| 4589 :key-sequence nil | |
| 4590 This means that the command normally has no | |
| 4591 keyboard equivalent. | |
| 4592 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
| 4593 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
| 4594 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
| 4595 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
| 4596 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
| 4597 | |
| 4598 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
| 4599 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
| 4600 | |
| 4601 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
| 4602 | |
| 4603 ** New event types | |
| 4604 | |
| 4605 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
| 4606 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
| 4607 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
| 4608 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
| 4609 | |
| 4610 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
| 4611 | |
| 4612 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
| 4613 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
| 4614 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
| 4615 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
| 4616 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
| 4617 forward, away from the user. | |
| 4618 | |
| 4619 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
| 4620 | |
| 4621 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
| 4622 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
| 4623 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
| 4624 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
| 4625 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
| 4626 | |
| 4627 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
| 4628 | |
| 4629 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
| 4630 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
| 4631 that were dragged and dropped. | |
| 4632 | |
| 4633 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
| 4634 | |
| 4635 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
| 4636 | |
| 4637 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
| 4638 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
| 4639 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
| 4640 | |
| 4641 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
| 4642 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
| 4643 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
| 4644 | |
| 4645 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
| 4646 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
| 4647 | |
| 4648 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
| 4649 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
| 4650 | |
| 4651 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
| 4652 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
| 4653 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
| 4654 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
| 4655 | |
| 4656 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
| 4657 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
| 4658 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
| 4659 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
| 4660 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
| 4661 | |
| 4662 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
| 4663 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
| 4664 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
| 4665 consistent with the new representation. | |
| 4666 | |
| 4667 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
| 4668 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
| 4669 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
| 4670 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
| 4671 | |
| 4672 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
| 4673 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
| 4674 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
| 4675 | |
| 4676 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
| 4677 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
| 4678 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
| 4679 | |
| 4680 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
| 4681 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
| 4682 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
| 4683 | |
| 4684 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
| 4685 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
| 4686 | |
| 4687 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
| 4688 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
| 4689 | |
| 4690 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
| 4691 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
| 4692 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
| 4693 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
| 4694 | |
| 4695 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
| 4696 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
| 4697 | |
| 4698 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
| 4699 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
| 4700 buffer or string being searched. | |
| 4701 | |
| 4702 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
| 4703 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
| 4704 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
| 4705 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
| 4706 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
| 4707 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
| 4708 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
| 4709 | |
| 4710 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
| 4711 | |
| 4712 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
| 4713 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
| 4714 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
| 4715 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
| 4716 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
| 4717 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
| 4718 define-coding-system-alias. | |
| 4719 | |
| 4720 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
| 4721 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
| 4722 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
| 4723 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
| 4724 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
| 4725 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
| 4726 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
| 4727 `iso-8859-1'. | |
| 4728 | |
| 4729 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
| 4730 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
| 4731 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
| 4732 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
| 4733 | |
| 4734 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
| 4735 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
| 4736 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
| 4737 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
| 4738 | |
| 4739 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
| 4740 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
| 4741 This function requires a user interaction. | |
| 4742 | |
| 4743 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
| 4744 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
| 4745 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
| 4746 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
| 4747 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
| 4748 select-safe-coding-system. | |
| 4749 | |
| 4750 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
| 4751 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
| 4752 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
| 4753 was done. | |
| 4754 | |
| 4755 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
| 4756 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
| 4757 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
| 4758 | |
| 4759 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
| 4760 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
| 4761 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
| 4762 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
| 4763 | |
| 4764 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
| 4765 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
| 4766 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
| 4767 converted. | |
| 4768 | |
| 4769 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
| 4770 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
| 4771 | |
| 4772 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
| 4773 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
| 4774 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
| 4775 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
| 4776 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
| 4777 range of characters. | |
| 4778 | |
| 4779 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
| 4780 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
| 4781 | |
| 4782 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
| 4783 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
| 4784 | |
| 4785 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
| 4786 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
| 4787 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
| 4788 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
| 4789 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
| 4790 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
| 4791 | |
| 4792 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
| 4793 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
| 4794 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
| 4795 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
| 4796 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
| 4797 | |
| 4798 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
| 4799 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
| 4800 | |
| 4801 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
| 4802 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
| 4803 | |
| 4804 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
| 4805 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
| 4806 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
| 4807 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
| 4808 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
| 4809 | |
| 4810 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
| 4811 | |
| 4812 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
| 4813 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
| 4814 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
| 4815 tree structure. | |
| 4816 | |
| 4817 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
| 4818 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
| 4819 | |
| 4820 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
| 4821 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
| 4822 in your .emacs file.) | |
| 4823 | |
| 4824 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
| 4825 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
| 4826 | |
| 4827 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
| 4828 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
| 4829 | |
| 4830 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
| 4831 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
| 4832 kills the region. | |
| 4833 | |
| 4834 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
| 4835 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
| 4836 | |
| 4837 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
| 4838 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
| 4839 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
| 4840 | |
| 4841 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
| 4842 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
| 4843 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
| 4844 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
| 4845 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
| 4846 past.) | |
| 4847 | |
| 4848 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
| 4849 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
| 4850 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
| 4851 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
| 4852 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
| 4853 | |
| 4854 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
| 4855 and is an alias for it. | |
| 4856 | |
| 4857 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
| 4858 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
| 4859 | |
| 4860 ** Scrolling changes | |
| 4861 | |
| 4862 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
| 4863 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
| 4864 | |
| 4865 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
| 4866 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
| 4867 where it started. | |
| 4868 | |
| 4869 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
| 4870 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
| 4871 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
| 4872 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
| 4873 | |
| 4874 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
| 4875 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
| 4876 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
| 4877 recenters the window. | |
| 4878 | |
| 4879 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
| 4880 | |
| 4881 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
| 4882 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
| 4883 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
| 4884 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
| 4885 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
| 4886 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
| 4887 | |
| 4888 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
| 4889 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
| 4890 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
| 4891 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
| 4892 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
| 4893 | |
| 4894 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
| 4895 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
| 4896 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
| 4897 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
| 4898 | |
| 4899 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
| 4900 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
| 4901 | |
| 4902 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
| 4903 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
| 4904 | |
| 4905 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
| 4906 | |
| 4907 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
| 4910 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
| 4911 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
| 4912 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
| 4913 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
| 4914 | |
| 4915 *** Input methods | |
| 4916 | |
| 4917 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
| 4918 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
| 4919 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
| 4920 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
| 4921 support several input methods. | |
| 4922 | |
| 4923 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
| 4924 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
| 4925 work. | |
| 4926 | |
| 4927 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
| 4928 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
| 4929 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
| 4930 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
| 4931 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
| 4932 letter. | |
| 4933 | |
| 4934 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
| 4935 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
| 4936 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
| 4937 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
| 4938 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
| 4939 | |
| 4940 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
| 4941 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
| 4942 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
| 4943 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
| 4944 | |
| 4945 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
| 4946 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
| 4947 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
| 4948 the first guess is wrong. | |
| 4949 | |
| 4950 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
| 4951 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
| 4952 | |
| 4953 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
| 4954 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
| 4955 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
| 4956 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
| 4957 | |
| 4958 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
| 4959 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
| 4960 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
| 4961 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
| 4962 | |
| 4963 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
| 4964 | |
| 4965 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
| 4966 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
| 4967 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
| 4968 what you want. | |
| 4969 | |
| 4970 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
| 4971 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
| 4972 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
| 4973 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
| 4974 | |
| 4975 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
| 4976 character conversion as well. | |
| 4977 | |
| 4978 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
| 4979 | |
| 4980 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
| 4981 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
| 4982 requires using many fonts. | |
| 4983 | |
| 4984 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
| 4985 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
| 4986 | |
| 4987 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
| 4988 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
| 4989 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
| 4990 you would use a font. | |
| 4991 | |
| 4992 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
| 4993 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
| 4994 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
| 4995 | |
| 4996 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
| 4997 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
| 4998 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
| 4999 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
| 5000 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
| 5001 | |
| 5002 *** Defining fontsets. | |
| 5003 | |
| 5004 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
| 5005 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
| 5006 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
| 5007 | |
| 5008 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
| 5009 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
| 5010 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
| 5011 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
| 5012 | |
| 5013 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
| 5014 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
| 5015 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
| 5016 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
| 5017 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
| 5020 The resource value should have this form: | |
| 5021 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
| 5022 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
| 5023 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
| 5024 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
| 5025 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
| 5026 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
| 5027 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
| 5028 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and | |
| 5029 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
| 5030 | |
| 5031 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
| 5032 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
| 5033 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
| 5034 | |
| 5035 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
| 5036 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
| 5037 following resource, | |
| 5038 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
| 5039 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
| 5040 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
| 5041 Here is the substitution rule: | |
| 5042 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
| 5043 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
| 5044 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
| 5045 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
| 5046 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
| 5047 | |
| 5048 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
| 5049 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
| 5050 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
| 5051 | |
| 5052 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
| 5053 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
| 5054 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
| 5055 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
| 5056 fontsets. | |
| 5057 | |
| 5058 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
| 5059 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
| 5060 | |
| 5061 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
| 5062 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
| 5063 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
| 5064 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
| 5065 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
| 5066 system for new files that you create. | |
| 5067 | |
| 5068 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
| 5069 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
| 5070 whole Emacs session. | |
| 5071 | |
| 5072 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
| 5073 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
| 5074 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
| 5075 | |
| 5076 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
| 5077 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
| 5078 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
| 5079 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
| 5080 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
| 5081 | |
| 5082 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
| 5083 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
| 5084 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
| 5085 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
| 5086 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
| 5087 | |
| 5088 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
| 5089 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
| 5090 | |
| 5091 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
| 5092 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
| 5093 | |
| 5094 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
| 5095 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
| 5096 | |
| 5097 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
| 5098 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
| 5099 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
| 5100 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
| 5101 of the file. | |
| 5102 | |
| 5103 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
| 5104 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
| 5105 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
| 5106 translated into that character code. | |
| 5107 | |
| 5108 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
| 5109 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
| 5110 | |
| 5111 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
| 5112 | |
| 5113 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
| 5114 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
| 5115 | |
| 5116 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
| 5117 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
| 5118 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
| 5119 | |
| 5120 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
| 5121 | |
| 5122 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
| 5123 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
| 5124 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
| 5125 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
| 5126 designed to work with terminals. | |
| 5127 | |
| 5128 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
| 5129 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
| 5130 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
| 5131 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
| 5132 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
| 5133 in the corresponding buffer. | |
| 5134 | |
| 5135 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
| 5136 | |
| 5137 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
| 5138 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
| 5139 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
| 5140 | |
| 5141 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
| 5142 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
| 5143 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
| 5144 want to use. | |
| 5145 | |
| 5146 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
| 5147 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
| 5148 | |
| 5149 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
| 5150 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
| 5151 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
| 5152 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
| 5153 | |
| 5154 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
| 5155 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
| 5156 related information. | |
| 5157 | |
| 5158 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
| 5159 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
| 5160 scripts. | |
| 5161 | |
| 5162 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
| 5163 information about the support for a particular language. | |
| 5164 You specify the language as an argument. | |
| 5165 | |
| 5166 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
| 5167 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
| 5168 first dash. | |
| 5169 | |
| 5170 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
| 5171 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
| 5172 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
| 5173 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
| 5174 | |
| 5175 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
| 5176 B big5 (Chinese) | |
| 5177 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
| 5178 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
| 5179 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
| 5180 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
| 5181 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
| 5182 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
| 5183 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
| 5184 R koi8 (Russian) | |
| 5185 Q tibetan | |
| 5186 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
| 5187 T lao | |
| 5188 T tis620 (Thai) | |
| 5189 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
| 5190 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
| 5191 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
| 5192 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
| 5193 z hz (Chinese) | |
| 5194 | |
| 5195 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
| 5196 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
| 5197 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
| 5198 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
| 5199 | |
| 5200 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
| 5201 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
| 5202 | |
| 5203 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
| 5204 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
| 5205 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
| 5206 Rmail files themselves. | |
| 5207 | |
| 5208 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
| 5209 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
| 5210 | |
| 5211 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
| 5212 for sending mail: | |
| 5213 | |
| 5214 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
| 5215 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
| 5216 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
| 5217 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
| 5218 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
| 5219 | |
| 5220 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
| 5221 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
| 5222 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
| 5223 translations. | |
| 5224 | |
| 5225 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
| 5226 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
| 5227 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
| 5228 without any conversion. | |
| 5229 | |
| 5230 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
| 5231 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
| 5232 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
| 5233 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
| 5234 | |
| 5235 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
| 5236 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
| 5237 | |
| 5238 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
| 5239 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
| 5240 | |
| 5241 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
| 5242 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
| 5243 | |
| 5244 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
| 5245 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
| 5246 in the buffer before point. | |
| 5247 | |
| 5248 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
| 5249 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
| 5250 you are using. | |
| 5251 | |
| 5252 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
| 5253 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
| 5254 | |
| 5255 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
| 5256 | |
| 5257 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
| 5258 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
| 5259 | |
| 5260 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
| 5261 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
| 5262 can become a bottleneck. | |
| 5263 | |
| 5264 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
| 5265 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
| 5266 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
| 5267 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
| 5268 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
| 5269 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
| 5270 | |
| 5271 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
| 5272 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
| 5273 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
| 5274 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
| 5275 | |
| 5276 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
| 5277 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
| 5278 show-paren-mode. | |
| 5279 | |
| 5280 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
| 5281 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
| 5282 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
| 5283 | |
| 5284 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
| 5285 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
| 5286 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
| 5287 | |
| 5288 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
| 5289 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
| 5290 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
| 5291 | |
| 5292 ** Changes in View mode. | |
| 5293 | |
| 5294 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
| 5295 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
| 5296 | |
| 5297 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
| 5298 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
| 5299 | |
| 5300 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
| 5301 previous state. | |
| 5302 | |
| 5303 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
| 5304 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
| 5305 | |
| 5306 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
| 5307 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
| 5308 not just the selected window. | |
| 5309 | |
| 5310 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
| 5311 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
| 5312 turns View mode on or off. | |
| 5313 | |
| 5314 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
| 5315 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
| 5316 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
| 5317 | |
| 5318 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
| 5319 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
| 5320 | |
| 5321 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
| 5322 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
| 5323 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
| 5324 which version to compare with. | |
| 5325 | |
| 5326 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
| 26264 | 5327 blocks if a match is inside the block. |
| 25853 | 5328 |
| 5329 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
| 5330 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
| 5331 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
| 5332 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
| 5333 | |
| 5334 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
| 5335 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
| 5336 blocks, all of them or none. | |
| 5337 | |
| 5338 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
| 5339 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
| 5340 confirmation first. | |
| 5341 | |
| 5342 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
| 5343 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
| 5344 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
| 5345 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
| 5346 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
| 5347 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
| 5348 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
| 5349 | |
| 5350 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
| 5351 | |
| 5352 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
| 5353 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
| 5354 | |
| 5355 ** M-x occur changes. | |
| 5356 | |
| 5357 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
| 5358 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
| 5359 | |
| 5360 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
| 5361 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
| 5362 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
| 5363 | |
| 5364 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
| 5365 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
| 5366 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
| 5367 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
| 5368 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
| 5369 | |
| 5370 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
| 5371 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
| 5372 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
| 5373 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
| 5374 | |
| 5375 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
| 5376 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
| 5377 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
| 5378 | |
| 5379 ** Outline mode changes. | |
| 5380 | |
| 5381 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
| 5382 | |
| 5383 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
| 5384 | |
| 5385 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
| 5386 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
| 5387 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
| 5388 was already active. | |
| 5389 | |
| 5390 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
| 5391 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
| 5392 get confused by it. | |
| 5393 | |
| 5394 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
| 5395 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
| 5396 | |
| 5397 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
| 5398 | |
| 5399 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
| 5400 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
| 5401 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
| 5402 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
| 5403 | |
| 5404 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
| 5405 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
| 5406 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
| 5407 | |
| 5408 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
| 5409 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
| 5410 values. | |
| 5411 | |
| 5412 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
| 5413 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
| 5414 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
| 5415 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
| 5416 | |
| 5417 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
| 5418 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
| 5419 can be. The default value is 30. | |
| 5420 | |
| 5421 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
| 5422 | |
| 5423 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
| 5424 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
| 5425 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
| 5426 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
| 5427 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
| 5428 behavior. | |
| 5429 | |
| 5430 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
| 5431 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
| 5432 | |
| 5433 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
| 5434 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
| 5435 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
| 5436 buffer that shows the original message. | |
| 5437 | |
| 5438 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
| 5439 with separator lines around the contents. | |
| 5440 | |
| 5441 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
| 5442 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
| 5443 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
| 5444 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
| 5445 | |
| 5446 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
| 5447 | |
| 5448 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
| 5449 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
| 5450 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
| 5451 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
| 5452 | |
| 5453 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
| 5454 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
| 5455 /etc/passwd. | |
| 5456 | |
| 5457 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
| 5458 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
| 5459 /etc/passwd. | |
| 5460 | |
| 5461 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
| 5462 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
| 5463 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
| 5464 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
| 5465 | |
| 5466 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
| 5467 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
| 5468 be taken to be magic. | |
| 5469 | |
| 5470 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
| 5471 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
| 5472 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
| 5473 | |
| 5474 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
| 5475 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
| 5476 | |
| 5477 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
| 5478 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
| 5479 | |
| 5480 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
| 5481 | |
| 5482 new key dired.el binding old key | |
| 5483 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
| 5484 * c dired-change-marks c | |
| 5485 * m dired-mark m | |
| 5486 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
| 5487 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
| 5488 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
| 5489 * u dired-unmark u | |
| 5490 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
| 5491 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
| 5492 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
| 5493 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
| 5494 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
| 5495 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
| 5496 | |
| 5497 ** Rmail changes. | |
| 5498 | |
| 5499 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
| 5500 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
| 5501 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
| 5502 each time you run it. | |
| 5503 | |
| 5504 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
| 5505 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
| 5506 | |
| 5507 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
| 5508 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
| 5509 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
| 5510 | |
| 5511 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
| 5512 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
| 5513 | |
| 5514 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
| 5515 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
| 5516 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
| 5517 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
| 5518 for output. | |
| 5519 | |
| 5520 ** Gnus changes. | |
| 5521 | |
| 5522 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
| 5523 | |
| 26264 | 5524 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
| 5525 Gnus. | |
| 5526 | |
| 5527 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
| 25853 | 5528 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
| 5529 | |
| 5530 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
| 5531 article mode line. | |
| 5532 | |
| 5533 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
| 5534 | |
| 5535 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
| 5536 | |
| 5537 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
| 5538 | |
| 5539 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
| 5540 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
| 5541 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
| 5542 | |
| 5543 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
| 5544 | |
| 5545 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
| 5546 | |
| 5547 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
| 5548 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
| 5549 | |
| 5550 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
| 5551 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
| 5552 used to pick articles. | |
| 5553 | |
| 5554 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
| 5555 another have been added. | |
| 5556 | |
| 5557 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
| 5558 | |
| 5559 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
| 5560 generating lines in buffers. | |
| 5561 | |
| 5562 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
| 5563 `M-C-_'. | |
| 5564 | |
| 5565 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
| 5566 | |
| 5567 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
| 5568 | |
| 5569 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
| 5570 | |
| 5571 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
| 26264 | 5572 |
| 25853 | 5573 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
| 5574 | |
| 5575 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
| 5576 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
| 5577 | |
| 5578 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
| 5579 the native server. | |
| 5580 | |
| 5581 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
| 5582 | |
| 5583 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
| 5584 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
| 5585 | |
| 5586 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
| 5587 | |
| 5588 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
| 5589 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
| 5590 | |
| 5591 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
| 5592 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
| 5593 | |
| 5594 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
| 5595 a group. | |
| 5596 | |
| 5597 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
| 5598 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
| 5599 | |
| 5600 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
| 5601 | |
| 5602 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
| 5603 | |
| 5604 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
| 5605 | |
| 5606 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
| 26264 | 5607 |
| 25853 | 5608 Use the `Y c' command. |
| 5609 | |
| 5610 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
| 5611 | |
| 5612 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
| 5613 | |
| 5614 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
| 5615 | |
| 5616 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
| 5617 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
| 26264 | 5618 |
| 25853 | 5619 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
| 5620 | |
| 5621 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
| 5622 | |
| 5623 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
| 5624 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
| 5625 | |
| 5626 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
| 5627 | |
| 5628 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
| 5629 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
| 5630 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
| 5631 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
| 5632 this issue.) | |
| 5633 | |
| 5634 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
| 5635 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
| 5636 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
| 5637 | |
| 5638 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
| 5639 | |
| 5640 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
| 5641 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
| 5642 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
| 5643 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
| 5644 for reading and posting). | |
| 5645 | |
| 5646 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
| 5647 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
| 5648 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
| 5649 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
| 5650 there. | |
| 5651 | |
| 5652 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
| 5653 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
| 5654 | |
| 5655 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
| 5656 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
| 5657 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
| 5658 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
| 5659 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
| 5660 | |
| 5661 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
| 5662 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
| 5663 | |
| 5664 ** CC mode changes. | |
| 5665 | |
| 5666 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
| 5667 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
| 5668 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
| 5669 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
| 5670 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
| 5671 loaded. | |
| 5672 | |
| 5673 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
| 26264 | 5674 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
| 25853 | 5675 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
| 26264 | 5676 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
| 5677 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
| 25853 | 5678 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
| 5679 | |
| 5680 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
| 5681 of the current buffer. | |
| 5682 | |
| 5683 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
| 5684 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
| 5685 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
| 5686 | |
| 5687 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
| 5688 style that the Python developers like. | |
| 5689 | |
| 5690 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
| 5691 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
| 5692 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
| 5693 | |
| 5694 ** VC Changes [new] | |
| 5695 | |
| 5696 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
| 5697 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
| 5698 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
| 5699 | |
| 5700 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
| 5701 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
| 5702 developers. | |
| 5703 | |
| 5704 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
| 5705 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
| 5706 | |
| 5707 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
| 5708 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
| 5709 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
| 5710 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
| 5711 | |
| 5712 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
| 5713 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
| 5714 | |
| 5715 ** Calendar changes. | |
| 5716 | |
| 5717 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | |
| 5718 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | |
| 5719 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | |
| 5720 | |
| 5721 ** ps-print changes | |
| 5722 | |
| 26264 | 5723 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. |
| 25853 | 5724 |
| 5725 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
| 5726 | |
| 5727 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
| 5728 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
| 5729 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
| 5730 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
| 5731 It defaults to `letter'. | |
| 5732 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
| 5733 | |
| 5734 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
| 26264 | 5735 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, |
| 25853 | 5736 non-nil means "landscape" mode. |
| 5737 | |
| 5738 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
| 5739 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
| 26264 | 5740 It defaults to 1. |
| 25853 | 5741 |
| 5742 *** Horizontal layout | |
| 5743 | |
| 5744 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
| 5745 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
| 5746 All are measured in points. | |
| 5747 | |
| 5748 *** Vertical layout | |
| 5749 | |
| 5750 The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
| 5751 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
| 5752 All are measured in points. | |
| 5753 | |
| 5754 *** Headers | |
| 5755 | |
| 5756 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
| 5757 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
| 5758 margin above the text. | |
| 5759 | |
| 26264 | 5760 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy |
| 25853 | 5761 framing box is printed around the header. |
| 5762 | |
| 5763 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
| 5764 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
| 5765 | |
| 26264 | 5766 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', |
| 5767 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
| 25853 | 5768 `ps-header-font-size'. |
| 5769 | |
| 5770 *** Font managing | |
| 5771 | |
| 5772 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
| 5773 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
| 5774 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
| 5775 elements to this alist. | |
| 5776 | |
| 26264 | 5777 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font |
| 25853 | 5778 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. |
| 5779 | |
| 5780 ** hideshow changes. | |
| 5781 | |
| 5782 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
| 26264 | 5783 C++, ; for lisp). |
| 25853 | 5784 |
| 5785 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
| 5786 | |
| 5787 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
| 5788 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
| 5789 | |
| 5790 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at | |
| 5791 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | |
| 5792 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
| 5793 | |
| 5794 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
| 5795 robust and a lot faster. | |
| 5796 | |
| 26264 | 5797 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
| 25853 | 5798 |
| 5799 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
| 5800 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
| 5801 documentation for more details. | |
| 5802 | |
| 5803 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
| 5804 | |
| 5805 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
| 5806 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
| 5807 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
| 5808 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
| 5809 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
| 5810 | |
| 5811 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
| 5812 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
| 5813 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
| 5814 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
| 5815 | |
| 5816 ** Font Lock mode | |
| 5817 | |
| 5818 *** Custom support | |
| 5819 | |
| 5820 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
| 5821 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
| 5822 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
| 5823 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
| 5824 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
| 5825 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
| 5826 | |
| 5827 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
| 5828 | |
| 5829 *** Maximum decoration | |
| 5830 | |
| 5831 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
| 5832 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
| 5833 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
| 5834 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
| 5835 to get the old behavior. | |
| 5836 | |
| 5837 *** New support | |
| 5838 | |
| 5839 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
| 5840 | |
| 5841 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
| 5842 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
| 5843 | |
| 5844 *** Configurable support | |
| 5845 | |
| 5846 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
| 5847 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
| 5848 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
| 5849 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
| 5850 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
| 5851 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
| 5852 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
| 5853 | |
| 5854 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
| 5855 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
| 5856 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
| 5857 | |
| 5858 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
| 5859 | |
| 5860 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
| 5861 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
| 5862 for any mode. | |
| 5863 | |
| 5864 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
| 5865 | |
| 5866 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
| 5867 | |
| 5868 in your ~/.emacs. | |
| 5869 | |
| 5870 *** New faces | |
| 5871 | |
| 5872 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
| 5873 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
| 5874 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
| 5875 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
| 5876 | |
| 5877 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
| 5878 | |
| 5879 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
| 5880 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
| 5881 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
| 5882 | |
| 5883 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
| 5884 | |
| 5885 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
| 5886 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
| 5887 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
| 5888 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
| 5889 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
| 5890 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
| 5891 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
| 5892 | |
| 5893 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
| 5894 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
| 5895 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
| 5896 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
| 5897 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
| 5898 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
| 5899 | |
| 5900 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
| 5901 | |
| 5902 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
| 5903 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
| 5904 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
| 5905 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
| 5906 | |
| 5907 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
| 5908 settings. | |
| 5909 | |
| 5910 ** Ada mode changes. | |
| 5911 | |
| 5912 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
| 5913 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
| 5914 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
| 5915 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
| 5916 stubs. | |
| 5917 | |
| 5918 *** There are two new commands: | |
| 5919 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
| 5920 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
| 5921 | |
| 5922 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
| 5923 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
| 26264 | 5924 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
| 25853 | 5925 |
| 5926 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
| 5927 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
| 5928 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
| 5929 | |
| 5930 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
| 5931 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
| 5932 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
| 5933 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
| 5934 | |
| 5935 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
| 5936 | |
| 5937 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
| 5938 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
| 5939 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
| 5940 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
| 5941 have any effect. | |
| 5942 | |
| 5943 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
| 5944 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
| 5945 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
| 5946 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
| 5947 | |
| 5948 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
| 5949 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
| 5950 | |
|
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5951 ** Changes to the emacsclient program |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5952 |
| 27475 | 5953 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or |
| 5954 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
| 5955 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
| 5956 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
| 5957 | |
|
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5958 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
| 25853 | 5959 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
| 5960 buffer in Emacs. | |
| 5961 | |
|
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5962 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5963 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5964 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5965 option takes precedence. |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5966 |
| 25853 | 5967 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
| 5968 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
| 5969 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
| 5970 | |
| 5971 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
| 5972 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
| 5973 the current defun. | |
| 5974 | |
| 5975 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
| 5976 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
| 5977 | |
| 5978 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
| 5979 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
| 5980 necessary). | |
| 5981 | |
| 5982 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
| 5983 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
| 5984 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
| 5985 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
| 5986 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
| 5987 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
| 5988 | |
| 5989 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
| 5990 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
| 5991 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
| 5992 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
| 5993 | |
| 5994 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
| 5995 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
| 5996 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
| 5997 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
| 5998 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
| 5999 | |
| 6000 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
| 6001 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
| 6002 | |
| 6003 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
| 6004 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
| 6005 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
| 6006 | |
| 6007 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
| 6008 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
| 6009 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
| 6010 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
| 6011 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
| 6012 | |
| 6013 ** RefTeX mode | |
| 6014 | |
| 6015 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
| 6016 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
| 6017 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
| 6018 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
| 6019 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
| 6020 | |
| 26264 | 6021 C-c ( reftex-label |
| 25853 | 6022 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
| 6023 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
| 6024 | |
| 6025 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
| 6026 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
| 6027 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
| 6028 | |
| 6029 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
| 6030 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
| 6031 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
| 6032 | |
| 6033 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
| 6034 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
| 6035 | |
| 6036 C-c = reftex-toc | |
| 6037 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
| 6038 can quickly jump to every section. | |
| 26264 | 6039 |
| 25853 | 6040 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
| 6041 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
| 6042 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
| 6043 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
| 6044 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
| 6045 | |
| 6046 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 6047 | |
| 6048 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
| 6049 | |
| 6050 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
| 6051 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
| 6052 | |
| 6053 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
| 6054 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
| 6055 | |
| 6056 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
| 6057 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
| 6058 | |
| 6059 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
| 6060 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
| 6061 appropriate functions. | |
| 6062 | |
| 6063 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
| 6064 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
| 6065 | |
| 6066 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
| 6067 been cleaned. | |
| 6068 | |
| 6069 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
| 6070 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
| 6071 | |
| 6072 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
| 6073 shall be delimited. | |
| 6074 | |
| 6075 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
| 6076 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
| 6077 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
| 6078 | |
| 6079 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
| 6080 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
| 6081 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
| 6082 | |
| 6083 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
| 6084 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
| 6085 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
| 6086 documentation). | |
| 6087 | |
| 6088 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
| 6089 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
| 6090 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
| 6091 | |
| 6092 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
| 6093 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
| 6094 | |
| 6095 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
| 6096 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
| 6097 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
| 6098 | |
| 6099 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
| 6100 | |
| 6101 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
| 6102 | |
| 6103 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
| 6104 from alien sources. | |
| 6105 | |
| 6106 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
| 6107 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
| 6108 crossref entries. | |
| 6109 | |
| 6110 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
| 6111 region. | |
| 6112 | |
| 6113 *** Added support for imenu. | |
| 6114 | |
| 6115 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
| 6116 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
| 6117 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
| 6118 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
| 6119 | |
| 6120 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
| 6121 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
| 6122 | |
| 6123 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
| 6124 | |
| 27136 | 6125 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
| 27112 | 6126 |
| 25853 | 6127 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
| 6128 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
| 6129 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
| 6130 as an argument. | |
| 6131 | |
| 6132 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
| 6133 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
| 6134 | |
| 6135 ** browse-url changes | |
| 6136 | |
| 6137 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
| 6138 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
| 6139 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
| 6140 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
| 6141 customization variables. | |
| 6142 | |
| 6143 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
| 6144 | |
| 6145 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
| 6146 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
| 6147 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
| 6148 | |
| 6149 ** Changes in Ediff | |
| 6150 | |
| 6151 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
| 6152 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
| 6153 | |
| 6154 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
| 6155 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
| 6156 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
| 6157 directories). | |
| 6158 | |
| 6159 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
| 6160 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
| 6161 files in the same directory. | |
| 6162 | |
| 6163 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
| 6164 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
| 6165 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
| 6166 | |
| 6167 ** Changes in Viper | |
| 6168 | |
| 6169 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
| 26264 | 6170 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
| 25853 | 6171 instead of vip-. |
| 6172 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
| 26264 | 6173 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
| 25853 | 6174 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
| 6175 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
| 6176 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
| 6177 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
| 6178 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
| 6179 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
| 6180 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
| 6181 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
| 6182 | |
| 6183 ** Etags changes. | |
| 6184 | |
| 6185 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
| 6186 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
| 6187 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
| 6188 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
| 6189 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
| 6190 | |
| 6191 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
| 6192 | |
| 6193 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
| 6194 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
| 6195 | |
| 6196 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
| 6197 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
| 6198 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
| 6199 | |
| 6200 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
| 6201 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
| 6202 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
| 6203 methods and protocols. | |
| 6204 | |
| 6205 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
| 6206 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
| 6207 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
| 6208 paragraph name. | |
| 6209 | |
| 6210 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
| 6211 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
| 6212 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
| 6213 | |
| 6214 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
| 6215 in files has changed slightly. | |
| 6216 | |
| 6217 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
| 6218 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
| 6219 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
| 6220 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
| 6221 | |
| 6222 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
| 6223 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
| 6224 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
| 6225 reasons. | |
| 6226 | |
| 6227 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
| 6228 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
| 6229 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
| 6230 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
| 6231 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
| 6232 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
| 6233 | |
| 6234 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
| 6235 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
| 6236 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
| 6237 | |
| 6238 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
| 6239 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
| 6240 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
| 6241 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
| 6242 | |
| 6243 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
| 6244 details. | |
| 6245 | |
| 6246 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
| 6247 | |
| 6248 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
| 6249 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
| 6250 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
| 6251 | |
| 6252 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
| 6253 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
| 6254 into Emacs. | |
| 6255 | |
| 6256 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
| 6257 | |
| 6258 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
| 6259 | |
| 6260 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
| 6261 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
| 6262 | |
| 6263 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
| 6264 | |
| 6265 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
| 6266 in shell buffers. | |
| 6267 | |
| 6268 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
| 6269 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
| 6270 and `elint-defun'. | |
| 6271 | |
| 6272 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
| 6273 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
| 6274 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
| 6275 strings or comments. | |
| 6276 | |
| 6277 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
| 6278 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
| 6279 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
| 6280 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
| 6281 at these points. | |
| 6282 | |
| 6283 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
| 6284 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
| 6285 | |
| 6286 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
| 6287 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
| 6288 | |
| 6289 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
| 6290 | |
| 6291 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
| 6292 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
| 6293 | |
| 6294 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
| 6295 | |
| 6296 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
| 6297 | |
| 6298 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
| 6299 | |
| 6300 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
| 6301 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
| 6302 | |
| 6303 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
| 6304 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
| 6305 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
| 6306 original place after inserting the copy. | |
| 6307 | |
| 6308 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
| 6309 on the buffer. | |
| 6310 | |
| 6311 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
| 6312 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
| 6313 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
| 6314 | |
| 6315 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
| 6316 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
| 6317 -or- | |
| 6318 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
| 6319 | |
| 6320 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
| 6321 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
| 6322 | |
| 6323 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
| 6324 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
| 6325 | |
| 6326 *** ogonek | |
| 6327 | |
| 6328 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
| 6329 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
| 6330 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
| 6331 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
| 6332 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
| 6333 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
| 6334 instance) and vice versa. | |
| 6335 | |
| 6336 To use this package load it using | |
| 6337 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
| 6338 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
| 26264 | 6339 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
| 25853 | 6340 M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
| 6341 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
| 6342 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
| 6343 | |
| 6344 *** Interface to ph. | |
| 6345 | |
| 6346 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
| 6347 | |
| 6348 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
| 6349 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
| 6350 these servers. | |
| 6351 | |
| 6352 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
| 6353 | |
| 6354 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
| 6355 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
| 6356 while the real cursor does not move. | |
| 6357 | |
| 6358 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
| 6359 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
| 6360 | |
| 6361 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
| 6362 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
| 6363 | |
| 6364 ** movemail change | |
| 6365 | |
| 6366 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
| 6367 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
| 6368 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
| 6369 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
| 6370 | |
| 6371 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
| 6372 | |
| 6373 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
| 6374 | |
| 6375 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
| 6376 | |
| 6377 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
| 6378 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
| 6379 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
| 6380 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
| 6381 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
| 6382 | |
| 6383 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
| 6384 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
| 6385 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
| 6386 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
| 6387 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
| 6388 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
| 6389 | |
| 6390 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
| 6391 | |
| 6392 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
| 6393 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
| 6394 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
| 6395 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
| 6396 | |
| 6397 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
| 6398 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
| 6399 | |
| 6400 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
| 6401 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
| 6402 "win". | |
| 6403 | |
| 6404 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
| 6405 | |
| 6406 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
| 6407 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
| 6408 | |
| 6409 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
| 6410 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
| 6411 or by the user. | |
| 6412 | |
| 6413 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
| 6414 | |
| 6415 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
| 6416 | |
| 6417 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
| 6418 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
| 6419 | |
| 6420 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
| 6421 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
| 6422 its argument. | |
| 6423 | |
| 6424 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
| 6425 | |
| 6426 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
| 6427 | |
| 6428 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
| 6429 | |
| 6430 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
| 6431 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
| 6432 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
| 6433 `format' function. | |
| 6434 | |
| 6435 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
| 6436 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
| 6437 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
| 6438 | |
| 6439 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
| 6440 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
| 6441 adding one of these suffixes. | |
| 6442 | |
| 6443 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
| 6444 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
| 26264 | 6445 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
| 25853 | 6446 |
| 6447 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
| 6448 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
| 6449 | |
| 6450 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
| 6451 | |
| 6452 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
| 6453 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
| 6454 | |
| 6455 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
| 6456 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
| 6457 | |
| 6458 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
| 6459 | |
| 6460 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
| 6461 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
| 6462 | |
| 6463 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
| 6464 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
| 6465 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
| 6466 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
| 6467 | |
| 6468 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
| 6469 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
| 6470 of the last form. | |
| 6471 | |
| 6472 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
| 6473 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
| 6474 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
| 6475 as the last form. | |
| 6476 | |
| 6477 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
| 6478 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
| 6479 matches. | |
| 6480 | |
| 6481 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
| 6482 | |
| 6483 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
| 6484 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
| 6485 Then it returns that string. | |
| 6486 | |
| 6487 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
| 6488 | |
| 6489 (with-output-to-string | |
| 6490 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
| 6491 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
| 6492 | |
| 6493 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
| 6494 | |
| 6495 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
| 6496 is non-nil. | |
| 6497 | |
| 6498 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
| 6499 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
| 6500 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
| 6501 | |
| 6502 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
| 6503 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
| 6504 | |
| 6505 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
| 6506 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
| 6507 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
| 6508 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
| 6509 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
| 6510 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
| 6511 | |
| 6512 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
| 6513 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
| 6514 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
| 6515 characters". | |
| 6516 | |
| 6517 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
| 6518 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
| 6519 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
| 6520 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
| 6521 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
| 6522 | |
| 6523 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
| 6524 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
| 6525 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
| 6526 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
| 6527 | |
| 6528 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
| 6529 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
| 6530 | |
| 6531 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
| 26264 | 6532 |
| 25853 | 6533 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
| 6534 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
| 6535 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
| 6536 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
| 6537 guaranteed. | |
| 6538 | |
| 6539 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
| 6540 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
| 6541 character). | |
| 6542 | |
| 6543 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
| 6544 | |
| 6545 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
| 6546 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
| 6547 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
| 6548 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
| 6549 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
| 6550 | |
| 6551 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
| 6552 | |
| 6553 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
| 6554 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
| 6555 more than the number of characters. | |
| 6556 | |
| 6557 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
| 6558 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
| 6559 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
| 6560 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
| 6561 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
| 6562 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
| 6563 | |
| 6564 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
| 6565 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
| 6566 | |
| 6567 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
| 6568 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
| 6569 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
| 6570 character, sref signals an error. | |
| 6571 | |
| 6572 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
| 6573 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
| 6574 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
| 6575 | |
| 6576 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
| 6577 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
| 6578 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
| 6579 | |
| 6580 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
| 6581 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
| 6582 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
| 6583 | |
| 6584 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
| 6585 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
| 6586 | |
| 6587 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
| 6588 | |
| 6589 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
| 6590 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
| 6591 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
| 6592 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
| 6593 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
| 6594 | |
| 6595 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
| 6596 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
| 6597 | |
| 6598 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
| 6599 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
| 6600 | |
| 6601 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
| 6602 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
| 6603 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
| 6604 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
| 6605 | |
| 6606 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
| 6607 | |
| 6608 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
| 6609 | |
| 6610 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
| 6611 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
| 6612 are not included in the resulting value. | |
| 6613 | |
| 6614 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
| 6615 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
| 6616 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
| 6617 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
| 6618 | |
| 6619 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
| 6620 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
| 6621 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
| 6622 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
| 6623 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
| 6624 column START-COLUMN. | |
| 6625 | |
| 6626 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
| 6627 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
| 6628 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
| 6629 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
| 6630 changed text, before the change. | |
| 6631 | |
| 6632 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
| 6633 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
| 6634 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
| 6635 | |
| 6636 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
| 6637 | |
| 6638 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
| 6639 | |
| 6640 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
| 6641 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
| 6642 | |
| 6643 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
| 6644 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
| 6645 which identify the character within that character set. | |
| 6646 | |
| 6647 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
| 6648 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
| 6649 opposite of split-char. | |
| 6650 | |
| 6651 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
| 6652 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
| 6653 | |
| 6654 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
| 6655 of all the characters in a string. | |
| 6656 | |
| 6657 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
| 6658 and specifying coding systems. | |
| 6659 | |
| 6660 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
| 6661 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
| 6662 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
| 6663 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
| 6664 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
| 6665 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
| 6666 | |
| 6667 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
| 6668 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
| 6669 | |
| 6670 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
| 6671 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
| 6672 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
| 6673 | |
| 6674 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
| 6675 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
| 6676 to match against a file name. | |
| 6677 | |
| 6678 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
| 6679 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
| 6680 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
| 6681 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
| 6682 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
| 6683 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
| 6684 | |
| 6685 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
| 6686 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
| 6687 | |
| 6688 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
| 6689 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
| 6690 | |
| 6691 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
| 6692 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
| 6693 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
| 6694 service names. | |
| 6695 | |
| 6696 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
| 6697 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
| 6698 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
| 6699 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
| 6700 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
| 6701 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
| 6702 | |
| 6703 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
| 6704 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
| 6705 | |
| 6706 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
| 6707 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
| 6708 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
| 6709 start the subprocess. | |
| 6710 | |
| 6711 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
| 6712 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
| 6713 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
| 6714 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
| 6715 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
| 6716 | |
| 6717 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
| 6718 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
| 6719 subprocess. | |
| 6720 | |
| 6721 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
| 6722 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
| 6723 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
| 6724 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
| 6725 | |
| 6726 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
| 6727 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
| 6728 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
| 6729 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
| 6730 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
| 6731 system for one operation at a time. | |
| 6732 | |
| 6733 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
| 6734 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
| 6735 | |
| 6736 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
| 6737 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
| 6738 The value is a cons cell, | |
| 6739 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
| 6740 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
| 6741 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
| 6742 input to the subprocess. | |
| 6743 | |
| 6744 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
| 6745 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
| 6746 | |
| 6747 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
| 6748 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
| 6749 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
| 6750 | |
| 6751 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
| 6752 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
| 6753 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
| 6754 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
| 6755 customization. | |
| 6756 | |
| 6757 Thus, instead of writing | |
| 6758 | |
| 6759 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
| 6760 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
| 6761 | |
| 6762 you would now write this: | |
| 6763 | |
| 6764 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
| 6765 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
| 6766 :type 'boolean | |
| 6767 :group foo) | |
| 6768 | |
| 6769 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
| 6770 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
| 6771 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
| 6772 for a description of them. | |
| 6773 | |
| 6774 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
| 6775 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
| 6776 | |
| 6777 (defgroup ispell nil | |
| 6778 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
| 6779 :group 'processes) | |
| 6780 | |
| 6781 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
| 6782 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
| 6783 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
| 6784 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
| 6785 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
| 6786 | |
| 6787 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
| 6788 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
| 6789 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
| 6790 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
| 6791 first-level subgroups. | |
| 6792 | |
| 6793 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
| 6794 | |
| 6795 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
| 6796 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
| 6797 | |
| 6798 ** easy-mmode | |
| 6799 | |
| 6800 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
| 6801 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
| 6802 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
| 6803 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
| 6804 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
| 6805 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
| 6806 | |
| 6807 ** Text property changes | |
| 6808 | |
| 6809 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
| 6810 text property. | |
| 6811 | |
| 6812 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
| 6813 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
| 6814 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
| 6815 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
| 6816 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
| 6817 | |
| 6818 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
| 6819 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
| 6820 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
| 6821 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
| 6822 | |
| 6823 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
| 6824 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
| 6825 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
| 6826 | |
| 6827 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
| 6828 | |
| 6829 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
| 6830 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
| 6831 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
| 6832 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
| 6833 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
| 6834 make the overlay visible. | |
| 6835 | |
| 6836 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
| 6837 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
| 6838 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
| 6839 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
| 6840 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
| 6841 t when it should hide it. | |
| 6842 | |
| 6843 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
| 6844 | |
| 6845 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
| 26264 | 6846 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
| 6847 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
| 25853 | 6848 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
| 26264 | 6849 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
| 25853 | 6850 Here is an example of how to do this: |
| 6851 | |
| 6852 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
| 26264 | 6853 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
| 25853 | 6854 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
| 26264 | 6855 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
| 25853 | 6856 |
| 6857 ... | |
| 6858 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
| 6859 | |
| 6860 ... | |
| 6861 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
| 6862 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
| 6863 ;; Or respectively: | |
| 6864 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
| 6865 | |
| 6866 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
| 6867 | |
| 6868 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
| 6869 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
| 6870 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
| 6871 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
| 6872 | |
| 6873 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
| 6874 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
| 6875 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
| 6876 | |
| 6877 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
| 6878 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
| 6879 | |
| 6880 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
| 6881 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
| 6882 | |
| 6883 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
| 6884 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
| 6885 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
| 6886 | |
| 6887 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
| 6888 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
| 6889 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
| 6890 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
| 6891 | |
| 6892 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
| 6893 of the current buffer. | |
| 6894 | |
| 6895 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
| 6896 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
| 6897 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
| 6898 | |
| 6899 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
| 6900 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
| 6901 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
| 6902 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
| 6903 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
| 6904 | |
| 6905 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
| 6906 text property. | |
| 6907 | |
| 6908 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
| 6909 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
| 6910 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
| 6911 | |
| 6912 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
| 6913 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
| 6914 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
| 6915 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
| 6916 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
| 6917 | |
| 6918 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
| 6919 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
| 6920 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
| 6921 | |
| 6922 ** Changes in face features | |
| 6923 | |
| 6924 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
| 6925 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
| 6926 | |
| 6927 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
| 6928 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
| 6929 | |
| 6930 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
| 6931 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
| 6932 | |
| 6933 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
| 6934 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
| 6935 | |
| 6936 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
| 6937 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
| 6938 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
| 6939 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
| 6940 overlay property). | |
| 6941 | |
| 6942 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
| 6943 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
| 6944 | |
| 6945 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
| 6946 | |
| 6947 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
| 6948 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
| 6949 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
| 6950 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
| 6951 | |
| 6952 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
| 6953 begins with ~. | |
| 6954 | |
| 6955 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
| 6956 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
| 6957 | |
| 6958 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
| 6959 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
| 6960 | |
| 6961 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
| 6962 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
| 6963 | |
| 6964 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
| 6965 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
| 6966 | |
| 6967 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
| 6968 (formerly it did not). | |
| 6969 | |
| 6970 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
| 6971 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
| 6972 | |
| 6973 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
| 6974 instead of constant strings. | |
| 6975 | |
| 6976 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
| 6977 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
| 6978 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
| 6979 | |
| 6980 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
| 6981 in the same way as before. | |
| 6982 | |
| 6983 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
| 6984 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
| 6985 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
| 6986 | |
| 6987 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
| 6988 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
| 6989 else, and returns nil. | |
| 6990 | |
| 6991 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
| 6992 directory cannot be listed. | |
| 6993 | |
| 6994 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
| 6995 | |
| 6996 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
| 6997 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
| 6998 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
| 6999 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
| 7000 ways: | |
| 7001 | |
| 7002 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
| 7003 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
| 7004 | |
| 7005 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
| 7006 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
| 7007 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
| 7008 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
| 7009 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
| 7010 | |
| 7011 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
| 7012 argument in this way. | |
| 7013 | |
| 7014 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
| 7015 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
| 7016 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
| 7017 | |
| 7018 ** Echo area features | |
| 7019 | |
| 7020 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
| 7021 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
| 7022 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
| 7023 after the echo area is cleared. | |
| 7024 | |
| 7025 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
| 7026 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
| 7027 | |
| 7028 ** Keyboard input features | |
| 7029 | |
| 7030 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
| 7031 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
| 7032 | |
| 7033 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
| 7034 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
| 7035 by keyboard macros. | |
| 7036 | |
| 7037 ** Frame-related changes | |
| 7038 | |
| 7039 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
| 7040 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
| 7041 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
| 7042 | |
| 7043 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
| 7044 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
| 7045 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
| 7046 | |
| 7047 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
| 7048 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
| 7049 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
| 7050 in the selected frame. | |
| 7051 | |
| 7052 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
| 7053 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
| 7054 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
| 7055 | |
| 7056 ** X Windows features | |
| 7057 | |
| 7058 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
| 7059 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
| 7060 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
| 7061 | |
| 7062 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
| 7063 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
| 7064 | |
| 7065 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
| 7066 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
| 7067 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
| 7068 | |
| 7069 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
| 7070 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
| 7071 | |
| 7072 ** Subprocess features | |
| 7073 | |
| 7074 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
| 7075 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
| 7076 automatically. | |
| 7077 | |
| 7078 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
| 7079 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
| 7080 | |
| 7081 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
| 7082 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
| 7083 | |
| 7084 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
| 7085 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
| 7086 | |
| 7087 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
| 7088 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
| 7089 goes after the other menu items. | |
| 7090 | |
| 7091 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
| 26264 | 7092 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
| 25853 | 7093 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
| 7094 are in use. | |
| 7095 | |
| 7096 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
| 7097 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
| 7098 | |
| 7099 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
| 7100 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
| 7101 form. | |
| 7102 | |
| 7103 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
| 7104 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
| 7105 but its hook is still run. | |
| 7106 | |
| 7107 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
| 7108 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
| 7109 | |
| 7110 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
| 7111 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
| 7112 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
| 7113 | |
| 7114 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
| 7115 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
| 7116 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
| 7117 warned. | |
| 7118 | |
| 7119 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
| 7120 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
| 7121 | |
| 7122 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
| 7123 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
| 7124 functions like display-time. | |
| 7125 | |
| 7126 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
| 7127 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
| 7128 | |
| 7129 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
| 7130 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
| 7131 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
| 7132 | |
| 7133 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
| 7134 if there is an error in compilation. | |
| 7135 | |
| 7136 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
| 7137 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
| 7138 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
| 7139 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
| 7140 | |
| 7141 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
| 7142 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
| 7143 the *scratch* buffer. | |
| 7144 | |
| 7145 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
| 7146 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
| 7147 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
| 7148 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
| 7149 | |
| 7150 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
| 7151 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
| 7152 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
| 7153 | |
| 7154 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
| 7155 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
| 7156 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
| 7157 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
| 7158 | |
| 7159 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
| 7160 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
| 7161 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
| 7162 | |
| 7163 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
| 7164 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
| 7165 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
| 7166 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
| 7167 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
| 7168 files at all. | |
| 7169 | |
| 7170 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
| 7171 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
| 7172 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
| 7173 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
| 7174 | |
| 7175 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
| 7176 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
| 7177 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
| 7178 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
| 7179 | |
| 7180 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
| 7181 | |
| 7182 ** imenu.el changes. | |
| 7183 | |
| 7184 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
| 26264 | 7185 item from menu created by imenu. |
| 25853 | 7186 |
| 7187 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
| 7188 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
| 7189 select one of those items. | |
| 7190 | |
| 7191 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
| 7192 | |
| 7193 * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | |
| 7194 | |
| 7195 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | |
| 7196 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | |
| 7197 | |
| 7198 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | |
| 7199 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | |
| 7200 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | |
| 7201 | |
| 7202 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
| 7203 | |
| 7204 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | |
| 7205 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | |
| 7206 | |
| 7207 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
| 7208 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | |
| 7209 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | |
| 7210 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | |
| 7211 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | |
| 7212 all caps. | |
| 7213 | |
| 7214 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | |
| 7215 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | |
| 7216 | |
| 7217 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | |
| 7218 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | |
| 7219 as in previous Emacs versions. | |
| 7220 | |
| 7221 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | |
| 7222 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | |
| 7223 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | |
| 7224 frames. | |
| 7225 | |
| 7226 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | |
| 7227 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | |
| 7228 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | |
| 7229 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | |
| 7230 accident. | |
| 7231 | |
| 7232 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | |
| 7233 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | |
| 7234 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | |
| 7235 line and then executing the macro. | |
| 7236 | |
| 7237 This command is not new, but was never documented before. | |
| 7238 | |
| 7239 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | |
| 7240 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | |
| 7241 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | |
| 7242 characters. | |
| 7243 | |
| 7244 ** Font Lock mode | |
| 7245 | |
| 7246 *** Font Lock support modes | |
| 7247 | |
| 7248 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | |
| 7249 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | |
| 7250 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | |
| 7251 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | |
| 7252 Font Lock mode is enabled. | |
| 7253 | |
| 7254 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | |
| 7255 | |
| 7256 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | |
| 7257 | |
| 7258 in your ~/.emacs. | |
| 7259 | |
| 7260 *** lazy-lock | |
| 7261 | |
| 7262 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | |
| 7263 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | |
| 7264 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | |
| 7265 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | |
| 7266 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | |
| 7267 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | |
| 7268 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | |
| 7269 | |
| 7270 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | |
| 7271 | |
| 7272 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | |
| 7273 | |
| 7274 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. | |
| 7275 | |
| 7276 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 7277 | |
| 7278 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | |
| 7279 paren and key. | |
| 7280 | |
| 7281 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | |
| 7282 supported. | |
| 7283 | |
| 7284 ** Gnus changes. | |
| 7285 | |
| 7286 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | |
| 7287 commands and variables have been added. There should be no | |
| 7288 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | |
| 7289 previously released version, except in the message composition area. | |
| 7290 | |
| 7291 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | |
| 7292 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | |
| 7293 | |
| 26264 | 7294 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
| 25853 | 7295 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
| 7296 obsolete. | |
| 7297 | |
| 7298 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | |
| 7299 missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | |
| 7300 | |
| 7301 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | |
| 7302 | |
| 7303 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | |
| 7304 | |
| 7305 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | |
| 7306 | |
| 7307 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | |
| 26264 | 7308 referred. |
| 25853 | 7309 |
| 7310 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | |
| 7311 | |
| 7312 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | |
| 7313 | |
| 7314 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | |
| 7315 | |
| 7316 (setq gnus-use-trees t) | |
| 7317 | |
| 7318 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | |
| 26264 | 7319 buffers. |
| 25853 | 7320 |
| 7321 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | |
| 7322 | |
| 7323 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | |
| 7324 | |
| 7325 `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | |
| 7326 | |
| 7327 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | |
| 7328 | |
| 7329 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | |
| 7330 | |
| 7331 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | |
| 7332 | |
| 7333 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | |
| 7334 | |
| 7335 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | |
| 7336 is possible. | |
| 7337 | |
| 7338 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | |
| 7339 | |
| 7340 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | |
| 7341 groups of groups. | |
| 7342 | |
| 7343 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | |
| 7344 | |
| 7345 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | |
| 26264 | 7346 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
| 25853 | 7347 |
| 7348 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | |
| 7349 | |
| 7350 *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | |
| 7351 | |
| 7352 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | |
| 7353 | |
| 7354 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | |
| 7355 | |
| 7356 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | |
| 7357 expiration times. | |
| 7358 | |
| 7359 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | |
| 7360 | |
| 7361 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | |
| 7362 process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | |
| 7363 | |
| 7364 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | |
| 7365 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | |
| 7366 bound to keys on the `/' submap. | |
| 7367 | |
| 7368 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | |
| 7369 articles with the `*' command. | |
| 7370 | |
| 7371 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | |
| 7372 | |
| 7373 *** Article headers can be buttonized. | |
| 7374 | |
| 7375 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | |
| 7376 | |
| 7377 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | |
| 7378 | |
| 26264 | 7379 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
| 25853 | 7380 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
| 7381 | |
| 7382 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | |
| 26264 | 7383 buffer. |
| 25853 | 7384 |
| 7385 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | |
| 7386 | |
| 7387 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | |
| 7388 | |
| 7389 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | |
| 7390 | |
| 7391 (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | |
| 7392 | |
| 26264 | 7393 *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
| 25853 | 7394 |
| 7395 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | |
| 7396 | |
| 26264 | 7397 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
| 25853 | 7398 |
| 7399 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | |
| 7400 | |
| 26264 | 7401 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
| 7402 | |
| 7403 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function | |
| 25853 | 7404 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
| 7405 | |
| 7406 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | |
| 26264 | 7407 refetching. |
| 25853 | 7408 |
| 7409 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | |
| 7410 | |
| 7411 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | |
| 7412 buffer to allow easier treatment. | |
| 7413 | |
| 7414 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | |
| 7415 | |
| 7416 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | |
| 7417 | |
| 7418 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | |
| 7419 | |
| 7420 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | |
| 26264 | 7421 articles. |
| 25853 | 7422 |
| 7423 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | |
| 7424 | |
| 26264 | 7425 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
| 25853 | 7426 |
| 7427 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | |
| 7428 cited text to hide is now customizable. | |
| 7429 | |
| 7430 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | |
| 7431 | |
| 7432 *** Boring headers can be hidden. | |
| 7433 | |
| 7434 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | |
| 7435 | |
| 7436 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | |
| 7437 | |
| 7438 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | |
| 7439 | |
| 7440 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | |
| 7441 in greater detail. | |
| 7442 | |
| 7443 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
| 7444 | |
| 7445 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | |
| 7446 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | |
| 7447 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | |
| 7448 exists. | |
| 7449 | |
| 7450 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | |
| 7451 as well as lists. | |
| 7452 | |
| 7453 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | |
| 7454 of a given keymap. | |
| 7455 | |
| 7456 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | |
| 7457 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | |
| 7458 keymap or nil. | |
| 7459 | |
| 7460 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | |
| 7461 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | |
| 7462 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | |
| 7463 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | |
| 7464 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | |
| 7465 alias. | |
| 7466 | |
| 7467 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | |
| 7468 | |
| 7469 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | |
| 7470 | |
| 7471 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | |
| 7472 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | |
| 7473 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | |
| 7474 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | |
| 7475 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | |
| 7476 | |
| 7477 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | |
| 7478 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | |
| 7479 `http://www.vtw.org/'. | |
| 7480 | |
| 7481 ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | |
| 7482 | |
| 7483 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | |
| 7484 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | |
| 7485 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | |
| 7486 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | |
| 7487 chapter of the manual for details. | |
| 7488 | |
| 7489 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | |
| 7490 customization variables take effect. | |
| 7491 | |
| 7492 ** Marking with the mouse. | |
| 7493 | |
| 7494 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | |
| 7495 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | |
| 7496 using M-x transient-mark-mode. | |
| 7497 | |
| 7498 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | |
| 7499 | |
| 7500 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | |
| 7501 | |
| 7502 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | |
| 7503 to work on NT only and not on 95.) | |
| 7504 | |
| 7505 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | |
| 7506 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | |
| 7507 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | |
| 7508 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | |
| 7509 applications, these problems are significant. | |
| 7510 | |
| 7511 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | |
| 7512 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | |
| 7513 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | |
| 7514 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | |
| 7515 other DOS application as a subprocess. | |
| 7516 | |
| 7517 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | |
| 7518 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | |
| 7519 | |
| 7520 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | |
| 7521 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | |
| 7522 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | |
| 7523 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | |
| 7524 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | |
| 7525 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | |
| 7526 | |
| 7527 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | |
| 7528 | |
| 7529 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | |
| 7530 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | |
| 7531 minibuffer contains. | |
| 7532 | |
| 7533 ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | |
| 7534 | |
| 7535 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | |
| 7536 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | |
| 7537 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | |
| 7538 affects just the displayed title of the frame. | |
| 7539 | |
| 7540 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | |
| 7541 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | |
| 7542 and also serves as the default for the displayed title | |
| 7543 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | |
| 7544 | |
| 7545 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | |
| 7546 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | |
| 7547 | |
| 7548 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | |
| 7549 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | |
| 7550 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | |
| 7551 | |
| 7552 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | |
| 7553 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | |
| 7554 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | |
| 7555 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | |
| 7556 | |
| 7557 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | |
| 7558 | |
| 7559 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | |
| 7560 to replace the characters it "deletes". | |
| 7561 | |
| 7562 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | |
| 7563 | |
| 7564 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | |
| 7565 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | |
| 7566 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | |
| 7567 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | |
| 7568 immediately after the selected one. | |
| 7569 | |
| 7570 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | |
| 7571 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | |
| 7572 | |
| 7573 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | |
| 7574 | |
| 7575 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | |
| 7576 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | |
| 7577 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | |
| 7578 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | |
| 7579 recover-session. | |
| 7580 | |
| 7581 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | |
| 7582 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | |
| 7583 will not work. | |
| 7584 | |
| 7585 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | |
| 7586 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | |
| 7587 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | |
| 7588 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | |
| 7589 now that the bug is fixed. | |
| 7590 | |
| 7591 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
| 7592 | |
| 7593 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | |
| 7594 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | |
| 7595 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | |
| 7596 which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | |
| 7597 | |
| 7598 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | |
| 7599 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | |
| 7600 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | |
| 7601 the link is visited and a warning displayed. | |
| 7602 | |
| 7603 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | |
| 7604 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | |
| 7605 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | |
| 7606 | |
| 7607 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | |
| 7608 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | |
| 7609 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | |
| 7610 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | |
| 7611 remain normal. | |
| 7612 | |
| 7613 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | |
| 7614 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | |
| 7615 | |
| 7616 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | |
| 7617 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | |
| 7618 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | |
| 7619 Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | |
| 7620 | |
| 7621 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | |
| 7622 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | |
| 7623 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | |
| 7624 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | |
| 7625 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | |
| 7626 `mail-directory-stream'.) | |
| 7627 | |
| 7628 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | |
| 7629 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | |
| 7630 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | |
| 7631 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | |
| 7632 | |
| 7633 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | |
| 7634 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | |
| 7635 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | |
| 7636 | |
| 7637 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | |
| 7638 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | |
| 7639 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | |
| 7640 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | |
| 7641 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | |
| 7642 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | |
| 7643 to a limitation in font-lock). | |
| 7644 | |
| 7645 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | |
| 7646 | |
| 7647 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | |
| 7648 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | |
| 7649 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | |
| 7650 this example: | |
| 7651 | |
| 7652 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
| 7653 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | |
| 7654 | |
| 7655 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 7656 | |
| 7657 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | |
| 7658 | |
| 7659 *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | |
| 7660 | |
| 7661 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | |
| 7662 | |
| 7663 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | |
| 7664 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | |
| 7665 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | |
| 7666 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | |
| 7667 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | |
| 7668 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | |
| 7669 | |
| 7670 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | |
| 7671 does the same job. | |
| 7672 | |
| 7673 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | |
| 7674 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | |
| 7675 | |
| 7676 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | |
| 7677 text. | |
| 7678 | |
| 7679 ** Font Lock mode | |
| 7680 | |
| 7681 *** Global Font Lock mode | |
| 7682 | |
| 7683 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | |
| 7684 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | |
| 7685 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | |
| 7686 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | |
| 7687 on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | |
| 7688 | |
| 7689 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | |
| 7690 | |
| 7691 (global-font-lock-mode t) | |
| 7692 | |
| 7693 in your ~/.emacs. | |
| 7694 | |
| 7695 *** Local Refontification | |
| 7696 | |
| 7697 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | |
| 7698 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | |
| 7699 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | |
| 7700 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | |
| 7701 | |
| 7702 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | |
| 7703 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | |
| 7704 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | |
| 7705 above and below point. | |
| 7706 | |
| 7707 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | |
| 7708 | |
| 7709 ** Follow mode | |
| 7710 | |
| 7711 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | |
| 7712 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | |
| 7713 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | |
| 7714 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | |
| 7715 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | |
| 7716 follow-mode. | |
| 7717 | |
| 7718 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | |
| 7719 | |
| 7720 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | |
| 7721 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | |
| 7722 | |
| 7723 ** hide-show changes. | |
| 7724 | |
| 7725 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | |
| 7726 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | |
| 7727 normal hooks. | |
| 7728 | |
| 7729 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | |
| 7730 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | |
| 7731 | |
| 7732 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | |
| 7733 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are | |
| 7734 those that begin a function, record, or macro. | |
| 7735 | |
| 7736 ** MSDOS Changes | |
| 7737 | |
| 7738 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | |
| 7739 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | |
| 7740 | |
| 7741 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | |
| 7742 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | |
| 7743 | |
| 7744 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | |
| 7745 | |
| 7746 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | |
| 7747 pressing both mouse buttons. | |
| 7748 | |
| 7749 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | |
| 7750 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | |
| 26264 | 7751 are: |
| 25853 | 7752 |
| 7753 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | |
| 7754 now works. | |
| 7755 | |
| 7756 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | |
| 7757 | |
| 7758 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | |
| 7759 implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | |
| 7760 | |
| 7761 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | |
| 7762 | |
| 7763 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | |
| 7764 | |
| 7765 **** `M-x recover-session' works. | |
| 7766 | |
| 7767 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | |
| 7768 | |
| 7769 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | |
| 7770 | |
| 7771 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | |
| 7772 | |
| 7773 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | |
| 7774 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | |
| 7775 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | |
| 7776 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | |
| 7777 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | |
| 7778 | |
| 7779 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | |
| 7780 | |
| 7781 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | |
| 7782 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | |
| 7783 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | |
| 7784 be different. | |
| 7785 | |
| 7786 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | |
| 7787 than `system-type'. | |
| 7788 | |
| 7789 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | |
| 7790 | |
| 7791 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | |
| 7792 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | |
| 7793 | |
| 7794 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | |
| 7795 that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | |
| 7796 | |
| 7797 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | |
| 7798 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | |
| 7799 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | |
| 7800 | |
| 7801 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | |
| 7802 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | |
| 7803 like this: | |
| 7804 | |
| 7805 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
| 7806 | |
| 7807 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | |
| 7808 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | |
| 7809 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | |
| 7810 | |
| 7811 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | |
| 7812 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | |
| 7813 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | |
| 7814 | |
| 7815 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | |
| 7816 up if too much time passes. | |
| 7817 | |
| 7818 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | |
| 7819 | |
| 7820 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | |
| 7821 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | |
| 7822 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | |
| 7823 form in BODY. | |
| 7824 | |
| 7825 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | |
| 7826 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | |
| 7827 call looks like this: | |
| 7828 | |
| 7829 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
| 7830 | |
| 7831 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | |
| 7832 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | |
| 7833 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | |
| 7834 ARGS. | |
| 7835 | |
| 7836 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | |
| 7837 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | |
| 7838 command. | |
| 7839 | |
| 7840 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | |
| 7841 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | |
| 7842 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | |
| 7843 each time Emacs becomes idle. | |
| 7844 | |
| 7845 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | |
| 7846 idle for SECS seconds. | |
| 7847 | |
| 7848 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | |
| 7849 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | |
| 7850 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | |
| 7851 instead. | |
| 7852 | |
| 7853 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | |
| 7854 there is no answer within a certain time. | |
| 7855 | |
| 7856 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | |
| 7857 | |
| 7858 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | |
| 7859 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | |
| 7860 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | |
| 7861 | |
| 7862 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | |
| 7863 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | |
| 7864 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | |
| 7865 arguments in between are ignored. | |
| 7866 | |
| 7867 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | |
| 7868 the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | |
| 7869 | |
| 7870 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | |
| 7871 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | |
| 7872 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | |
| 7873 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | |
| 7874 version. | |
| 7875 | |
| 7876 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | |
| 7877 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | |
| 7878 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | |
| 7879 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | |
| 7880 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | |
| 7881 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | |
| 7882 | |
| 7883 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | |
| 7884 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | |
| 7885 systems with limited file name syntax. | |
| 7886 | |
| 7887 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | |
| 7888 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | |
| 7889 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | |
| 7890 completions.el: | |
| 7891 | |
| 7892 (defvar save-completions-file-name | |
| 7893 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | |
| 7894 "*The filename to save completions to.") | |
| 7895 | |
| 7896 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | |
| 7897 depends on the operating system, because the definition of | |
| 7898 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | |
| 7899 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | |
| 7900 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | |
| 7901 | |
| 7902 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | |
| 7903 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | |
| 7904 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | |
| 7905 | |
| 7906 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | |
| 7907 marker from its buffer position. | |
| 7908 | |
| 7909 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | |
| 7910 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | |
| 7911 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | |
| 7912 | |
| 7913 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | |
| 7914 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | |
| 7915 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | |
| 7916 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | |
| 7917 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | |
| 7918 regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | |
| 7919 | |
| 7920 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | |
| 7921 errors that happen often during editing. | |
| 7922 | |
| 7923 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | |
| 7924 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | |
| 7925 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | |
| 7926 | |
| 7927 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | |
| 7928 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | |
| 7929 | |
| 7930 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | |
| 7931 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | |
| 7932 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | |
| 7933 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | |
| 7934 and not get-buffer-window. | |
| 7935 | |
| 7936 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | |
| 7937 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | |
| 7938 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | |
| 7939 | |
| 7940 If you use this feature, you should set the variable | |
| 7941 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | |
| 7942 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | |
| 7943 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | |
| 7944 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | |
| 7945 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | |
| 7946 over and over for the same text. | |
| 7947 | |
| 7948 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | |
| 7949 | |
| 7950 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | |
| 7951 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | |
| 7952 | |
| 7953 ;; @(#) HEADER: text | |
| 7954 ;; $HEADER: text $ | |
| 7955 | |
| 7956 in addition to the normal | |
| 7957 | |
| 7958 ;; HEADER: text | |
| 7959 | |
| 7960 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | |
| 7961 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | |
| 7962 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | |
| 7963 | |
| 7964 * For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
| 7965 | |
| 7966 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 7967 Copyright information: | |
| 7968 | |
| 27200 | 7969 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 25853 | 7970 |
| 7971 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
| 7972 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
| 7973 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
| 7974 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
| 7975 | |
| 7976 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
| 7977 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
| 7978 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
| 7979 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
| 7980 | |
| 7981 Local variables: | |
| 7982 mode: outline | |
| 7983 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
| 7984 end: |
